Manual Sct Lct

Subnetwork Craft Terminal Link Manager Terminal Siae equipment subnetwork supervision and management software application Release 1.4 User manual

Volume 1/1 MN.00095.E - 013

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice. Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product. Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

SUBNETWORK CRAFT TERMINAL LINK MANAGER TERMINAL

CONTENTS 1. SCT/LMT PROGRAM ................................ ................................................................ ............................................................... ........................................3 .........3 1.1

Program modular structure ....................................... .............................................................................. ................................................4 .........4

1.2

Siae equipment managed managed by the SCT/LMT program ..................................... .....................................................5 ................5

1.3

Version of the SCT/LMT program and of the LCT software modules ................................6

1.4

Program limits........................................................... limits.................................................................................................. ..............................................6 .......6

1.5

Update of the SCT/LMT program from 1.0 release to 1.1 or higher ones.........................7

2. INSTALLATION OF THE SCT/LMT PROGRAM .............................. .............................................................. .....................................9 .....9 3. START UP OF THE SCT/LMT PROGRAM.......................................................... PROGRAM..........................................................................22 ................22 4. SCT/LMT WINDOW ................................ ................................................................. .................................................................. ......................................23 .....23 4.1

Title bar .................................... .......................................................................... ............................................................................24 ......................................24

4.2

Menu bar ................................... ......................................................................... ...........................................................................24 .....................................24

4.3

Tools bar .................................. ....................................................................... ........................................................................... ........................................ 25

4.4

“Station list” area area ................................. ....................................................................... .................................................................26 ...........................26

4.5

“Equipment list” list” area ................................... ........................................................................... .......................................................... .................. 28

4.6

“Alarm history log” area ...................................... .............................................................................. ................................................... ........... 31 4.6.1

“Alarm history log” area - “N.E. Logger” menu ................................... ........................................... ........ 37

4.6.2

“Alarm history log” area - “Cmd Logger” menu........................................... 42

5. MENUS ............................. ............................................................ .............................................................. ............................................................. ...............................48 .48 5.1

Connect/Disconnect Connect/Disconnect menu...................................................... menu.......................................................................................48 .................................48 5.1.1

Automatic activation of the connection....................................................... connection....................................................... 52

5.2

Login menu ...................................... ............................................................................. .....................................................................53 ..............................53

5.3

Logout menu .................................... ........................................................................... .....................................................................54 ..............................54

5.4

Refresh menu........................................ menu.............................................................................. ................................................................5 ..........................5 5

5.5

Equipment menu .................................. ........................................................................ .................................................................56 ...........................56 5.5.1

Equipment - LCT Interface/Open LOM........................................................ LOM........................................................ 57

5.5.2

Equipment - Properties ..................................... ........................................................................... ........................................ 59

5.5.3

Equipment - View Current Current Alarms .................................. .............................................................6 ...........................6 2

5.5.4

Equipment - Alarm Severity Config............................................................6 Config............................................................6 3

5.5.5

Equipment - View Active Manual Manual Operation Operation ...................................... ................................................ .......... 67

SCT/LMT Release 1.4 – MN.00095.E – 013

1

5.5.6

Equipment – History Events Realignment Realignment ................................ ................................................... ................... 68

5.5.7

Equipment - Version................................................................................ Version................................................................................ 69

5.5.8

Equipment - Performances ................................... ....................................................................... .................................... 74 5.5.8.1

PM Measurements Measurements for the US radio equipment.................................. 79

5.5.8.2

PM Measurements Measurements for the EL radio equipment................................... equipment................................... 97

5.5.8.3

PM Measurements Measurements for the the PDH-AL radio equipment ......................... 108

5.5.8.4

PM Measurements Measurements for the ADM-C equipment equipment ................................ .................................. .. 125

5.5.9

Equipment - Units Units ................................... ......................................................................... .............................................. ........ 139

5.5.10

Equipment - Diagnosis....................................................... Diagnosis........................................................................... .................... 141

5.5.11

Equipment - Communication Communication Setup ................................... ......................................................... ...................... 144 5.5.11.1 Equipment - Communication Communication Setup - Routing Table Table ......................... 145 5.5.11.2 Equipment - Communication Communication Setup - Stored Routing Table............... Table............... 149 5.5.11.3 Equipment - Communication Communication Setup - Port Configuration................... Configuration................... 154 5.5.11.4 Equipment - Communication Communication Setup Setup – OSPF OSPF ................................ .................................... .... 165

5.6

5.5.12

Equipment - IP/OSI Table Alignment ................................ ....................................................... ....................... 192

5.5.13

Equipment - Disable/Enable Disable/Enable ................................. ................................................................... .................................. 192

5.5.14

Equipment – Equipment Features Management.................... Management......................................... ..................... 193

5.5.15

Equipment – Equipment Equipment Inventory Report................................................ Report................................................ 195

Network menu....................................................................... menu..................................................................................................... .............................. 196 5.6.1

5.6.2 5.7

5.8

2

Network - Admin Admin Tools .................................. ......................................................................... ......................................... 197 5.6.1.1

Network - Admin Tools - User Manager.......................................... Manager.......................................... 197

5.6.1.2

Network - Admin Tools - Time Settings Settings ........................................ .......................................... .. 204

Network - View View Logged User User ....................................... .................................................................. ........................... 206

Options menu............................................................................. menu...................................................................................................... ......................... 209 5.7.1

Options - ‘’General’’ card.................................................... card........................................................................ .................... 209

5.7.2

Options - ‘’Connection’’ ‘’Connection’’ card................................................................... card................................................................... 212

5.7.3

Options - ‘’Acknowledge’’ ‘’Acknowledge’’ card ...................................... ................................................................ .......................... 215

Tools menu .................................... ............................................................................ ..................................................................... ............................. 218 5.8.1

Tools - Equipment Configuration Wizard .................................. .................................................. ................ 218

5.8.2

Tools - Subnetwork Configuration Configuration Wizard................................................. Wizard................................................. 239

5.8.3

Tools - Monitoring File File Viewer................................................................. Viewer................................................................. 251


1.

SCT/LMT PROGRAM

To control and manage its own telecommunication telecommunication equipment, Siae Microelettronica has developed a software application called SCT (Subnetwork Craft Terminal) or Terminal) or LMT (Link Manager Terminal). Terminal).

By means of the SCT graphical interface, it is possible to manage up to a maximum of 100 Siae equipment. By means of the LMT graphical interface, it is possible to manage up to a maximum of 2 Siae equipment. Warning. With the exception of the above pointed out limitations, the SCT and LMT graphical interfaces are provided with the same commands and functions 1.

The main functions available with the SCT/LMT application program are the following ones: •

Possibility to connect the PC (where it is installed the program) to the equipment through RS232 serial RS232 serial connection (that can be remotized through modem) or Ethernet local network.

•

List of all the equipment present into the network, connection status with the program. In the case of active connection, it is possible to execute the following operations: −

to check and to change the network characteristics of the equipment (network identification code, reference date/time, etc.);

−

to execute the software reset of the equipment;

−

to display the current alarms o f the equipment;

−

to display the hardware composition of the equipment;

−

to check the version and to execute the updating of the equipment software/firmware;

−

to activate (and deactivate) the measurements of Performance Monitoring (PM) and to check the results of the measurements displayed displayed as a graphic or as a table.

−

check and change the seriousness level or the alarms and/or disable them.

−

check the activation status of the manual operations (loop, switching, etc.) and define a timeout after which the system automatically automatically deactivates the active manual operations.

−

check and change the configuration parameters of the communication ports available for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal (IP Address, IP NetMask, etc.).

−

check and change the setting of the static routing table and the gateway default address currently used by the equipment (“Running” routing table and default gateway) and the ones memorized into the equipment (“Backup” routing table and default gateway).

−

−

−

•

check and change the configuration parameters of the OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) routing dynamic protocol. only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network (Government OSI Profile) address Profile) address of the equipment.

2

, check and change the GOSIP

run the diagnostics prog ram which, analyzing the active alarms of the selected equipment, returns the possible causes that have triggered the alarms themselves.

Possibility to monitor all the equipment connected to the program and to memorize the failures into the alarm history (installed on the PC disk). The signals memorized into the alarm history are “connected” one each other. This means that the activation notification of an alarm is displayed for the user through a record where the system points out the date/time of activation of the alarm itself. The reset of the alarm is

1

Into the help online/manual, the wording “… SCT/LMT”, means that the described function is available as for the SCT graphical interface as into the LMT one.

2

The OSI network is a network where it is used also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol as communication protocol between the network elements. elements.


3

pointed out adding the indication of the deactivation date/time record.

3

to the already existing

•

Possibility to save on file the alarm/event signals present into the alarm log of an equipment and to determine, through some filters, the type of signals that the equipment has to record into its alarm log.

•

Possibility to “access” (login) to one or more equipment to check and change the configuration parameters, to execute maintenance operations and check ones (for instance the check of the signal quality).

•

Possibility to “access” (login) to the same equipment for more SCT/LMT users at the same time.

•

Possibility to save into a file the configuration of an equipment (configuration parameters or communication ones 4) or a “virtual” configuration. Later, it will be possible to transfer the configuration memorized into the file to a generic equipment present into the network.

•

Possibility to open the viewer (Monitoring File Viewer) of the Siae Alarm & Performance Monitoring program 5, and to display the monitoring files (alarms and PM measurements) recorded with the above mentioned program.

•

Possibility to define the list of the users that can be connected to the equipment.

•

Possibility to define the list of the remote equipment that have to be connected with the program.

•

Possibility to subdivide the list of the remote equipment into stations for a better view of the equipment network “reachable” of the local equipment.

•

Possibility to be connected with the remote equipment present into the list stored into a defined equipment or into the list saved on a file.

•

Possibility to access to the program by means of four different user profiles that define the available commands and functions.

•

Possibility to display the list of the operations executed by the SCT/LMT users relevant to an equipment and to memorize them on a file. Warning. The subject operation is available only for the equipment of PDH-AL type.

•

1.1

Possibility to install, during the same installation procedure, the SCT/LMT program and/or the Alarm & Performance Monitoring one.

Program modular structure

The program SCT/LMT is an extremely flexible application program because it has a modular structure. The program is composed by a main software module, called SCT or LMT. To such a module, according to the type of Siae equipment to be managed, it is added an additional software module called LCT (Local Craft Terminal).

3

Into the previous versions of the SCT/LMT program, the occurrence/reset notification of an alarm was displayed for the user through two different records and a possible correlation was at operator’s charge. 4

IP address, routing table, Gosip address, OSPF parameters, etc.

5

The Alarm & Performance Monitoring program allows monitoring all the connected equipment and memorizing on a file the results of the PM measurements and the alarms/events. More detailed information concerning the program are reported into the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on line guide/manual.

4


The main module manages the main graphical interface (SCT/LMT main window ). Through such a window, the user can activate/deactivate the connection with all the equipment, can check their functional status (current alarms and alarm history), the hardware composition, the version of the equipment sw/fw, etc. At this level the equipment is considered as a whole.

The additional module has the task to provide to the general graphical interface the specific commands and functions with respect to the equipment type to be managed. Each additional module manages a specific equipment graphical interface (LCT interface). Through such an interface, the user can control the equipment functioning status and also act directly on its management checking or changing the configuration parameters. The SCT/LMT program can be provided with one or more LCT additional modules according to the equipment types present into the network.

The access to the general graphical interface is executed at the SCT/LMT program starting up. The access to the equipment graphical interface is executed selecting the LCT Interface command. Warning. Such a command is available only if it has been activated the connection between the SCT/LMT program and the equipment under examination. The opening of the LCT interface is coupled with the opening of the SCT/LMT application program.

1.2

Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program

The Siae equipment that can actually be managed by the SCT/LMT program are the following ones: •

US (Urban Synchronous link). Radio equipment with medium and high capacity (SDH).

•

EL – Easylink series Radio. Radio equipment with medium and low capacity (PDH).

•

PDH-AL (PDH - Access Link). Access Link series radio equipment (PDH).

•

ELFO (EasyLink Full Outdoor). Outdoor radio equipment with medium and low capacity (PDH).

• • •

ADM-C (Add Drop Multiplexer – Compact). Multiplexer equipment (SDH). PMP (Point to MultiPoint). Point to MultiPoint system. CommServer-S. Equipment provided with 7 serial ports to realize the physical connections between the Siae NMS5UX supervisory system and the equipment that have to be checked and managed by the supervisory system itself.

Warning. For the US, EL, PDH-AL, ADM-C and CommServer-S equipment, the relevant LCT interfaces are available. For the PMP systems, it is available, as equipment graphical interface, the specific local management program called PMP Master 6. For the ELFO radio equipment, it is available, as equipment graphical interface, the specific local management pr ogram called LOM ELFO 7.

6

For more detailed information, refer to the Siae documentation relevant to the PMP Master program. 7

For more detailed information, refer to the Siae documentation relevant to the LOM ELFO program.


5

1.3

Version of the SCT/LMT program and of the LCT software modules

The version of the SCT/LMT program installed on his own PC, can be checked: •

into the program starting-up window.

•

into the title bar of the SCT/LMT window.

•

select the About…8 command present into the Help menu.

The version of the additional software modules installed on his own PC, can be checked: •

into the lower bar of the specific equipment interface 9.

•

select the About…8 command present into the Help menu.

1.4

Program limits

SCT program

Limit

Maximum number of equipment into the “remote equipment” list.......100 Maximum number of stations into the “remote equipment” list...........30 Maximum number of equipment that can be connected at the same time...........................................................100 Maximum number of users (SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) connected at the same time with an equipment...............................................610 Number of signals into the Alarm History Log area ...........................from 100 to 10000 (settable)

LMT program

Limit

Maximum number of equipment into the “remote equipment” list.......100 Maximum number of stations into the “remote equipment” list...........30 Maximum number of equipment that can be connected at the same time...........................................................2 Maximum number of users (SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) connected at the same time with an equipment...............................................610 Number of signals into the Alarm History Log area ...........................from 100 to 10000 (settable)

8

About Subnetwork Craft Terminal (SCT interface), About Link Manager Terminal (LMT interface).

9

RadioSDH window, RadioPDH window, CommServer window, etc.

10

The sixth user can require the connection only if he has the System profile.

For instance, if five users are connected, in connected/login status, with an equipment and an additional user with Read only profile (or Read and Write or Station Operator) requires for the connection, the equipment does not allow the operation. On the contrary, if the request for the connection has been executed by an user with System profile ( SYSTEM or NMS5UX user ), the system accepts the request.

6


1.5

Update of the SCT/LMT program from 1.0 release to 1.1 or higher ones

The users that operate for the first time with the 1.1 release or higher ones of the SCT/LMT program, having used the 1.0 release before, will not have to execute any data conversion operation.

The main “new feature” of the new release consists of a different displaying of the equipment (into the 1.1 release or higher ones, the equipment are displayed into the Equipment list area , subdivided into stations). This change causes a different management of the “remote equipment” list. With the 1.0 release, the user had to use the Remote Element Table for the management of the “remote equipment” list; with the 1.1 release or higher ones he will have to use the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard option. Then, it will be necessary to pay attention to the opening of a “remote equipment” list - set with the SCT/LMT 1.0 program and stored into the equipment controller or saved into a file– with the SCT/LMT program 1.1 release or higher ones.

To reorganize the “old” “remote equipment” list into stations, it is advisable to execute the following procedure: •

remote equipment list stored into the controller of an equipment

•

remote equipment list saved into a file

Remote equipment list stored into the controller of an equipment 1. Subdivide, on the paper, your own equipment network into units (stations). 2. Connect the equipment in such a way that the equipment is in connected/login status and with the System user profile. 3. Open the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window using the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard option (Tools menu). 4. Into the Actual Configuration area , select the equipment. 5. Choose the Retrieve push-button. Into the New Configuration area , the program displays the “remote equipment” list stored into the selected equipment. All the equipment present into the list are contained into a station called Undefined. 6. Create the stations. 7. Move the equipment present into the Undefined station into the new belonging stations. It is possible to change the name of the Undefined station. 8. Into a new station, create also the equipment from which it has been restored the “remote equipment” list. In such a way, the user couples to a station also the equipment from which it has been restored the list (such an equipment is not present into the New Configuration area). If the user does not execute this operation, at the next connection with the equipment under examination, the equipment present into the “remote equipment” list will be displayed into the SCT/LMT window subdivided into the relevant stations while the equipment under examination (local equipment) will be into the Undefined station. 9. Communicate the new list to the equipment or save it on a file as described into the Tools Subnetwork Configuration Wizard chapter.


7

Warning. If the user opens a “remote equipment” list with more than 100 elements, into the New Configuration area of the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window, the program will point out the first 100 equipment only.

Remote equipment list saved into a file 1. Subdivide, on the paper, your own equipment network into units (stations). 2. Open the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window using the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard option. 3. Choose the Read From File push-button. The program displays the Open remote element configuration file window. 4. Select the file (with .rel extension ) where it has been stored the desired “remote equipment” list. 5. Choose the Open push-button. Into the New Configuration area , the “remote equipment” list. All the equipment of the list are contained into a station called Undefined. 6. Create the stations. 7. Move the equipment present into the Undefined station into the new belonging stations. It is possible to change the name of the Undefined station. 8. Communicate the new list to the equipment or save it on a file as described into the Tools Subnetwork Configuration Wizard chapter. Warning. If the user opens a “remote equipment” list with more than 100 elements, into the New Configuration area of the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window, the program will point out the first 100 equipment only.

8


2.

INSTALLATION OF THE SCT/LMT PROGRAM

This document contains the procedures for the installation of the SCT/LMT program. With details: •

hardware and software requirements

•

at the first installation of the SCT/LMT program

•

checks and operations to be executed after the first installation of the SCT/LMT program

•

updating of the SCT/LMT program and/or of the LCT additional modules and/or of the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program

Warning. During the installation procedure, it is possible to install also (or only) the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program 11.

Hardware and software requirements Before installing the program, check that the available hardware and the software comply with the following requirements.

Hardware •

Personal Computer whit Pentium 100 MHz or higher processor.

•

VGA graphical card or another one compatible with Windows.

•

Compact Disk drive

•

Available memory on hard disk at least 20 MB.

•

At least 64 MB of RAM memory.

•

Serial interface.

•

Modem with AT Hayes standard (only for remote connection).

•

Network interface (only for connection with Ethernet network).

Software •

Microsoft Windows (95, 98, NT, ME, 2000, XP).

11

The Alarm & Performance Monitoring program allows monitoring all the connected equipment and memorizing on a file the r esults of the PM measurements and the alarms/events. More detailed information concerning the program are reported into the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on line guide/manual.


9

At the first installation of the SCT/LMT program At the first installation of the program, the system executes the installation of the SCT or LMT main software module and of the LCT additional ones relevant to the types of the requested Siae equipment and, if it is requested, of the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program. Warning. The PMP Master program for the management of the PMP systems and the LOM ELFO program for the management of the ELFO radio equipment are not installed together with the SCT/LMT one. They have to be installed separately following the indications pointed out into the specific on-line guide/manual.

At the first installation of the program, execute the following procedure: 1. Start up Windows. 2. Close all the application programs on progress as the ones open on the desktop as the ionised ones. 3. Insert the installation CD, into the proper unit. The installation procedure is automatically started-up (auto-run). 4. Execute the indications displayed on the video screen. The parameters requested during the installation procedure and the operations necessary to set such parameters are the following ones: a. Installation key (Validation window). Type, into the proper spaces, the number pointed out into the “License certification” of the SCT/LMT product 12. The available code defines the general software module type (SCT or LMT) and the additional LCT software modules that will be available for the user at the end of the installation. b. Program to be installed ( Available Programs window ): Subnetwork Craft Terminal, Alarm & Performance Monitoring. Activate the box relevant to the desired program. It is possible to activate more boxes at the same time. c. Language to be installed for the help online of the SCT/LMT program and of the LCT modules (Select Language window): English, French, Italian, Spanish 13. Select the desired option. It is possible to select one option only. d. The group name where it has to be inserted the starting up command of the program (Choose Destination Location window). The installation program by default advises a pr e-defined name that can be changed. e. Physical connection type between the PC, on which it has been loaded the program, and the equipment (Connection Type window). Select the following option: −

Connect using direct serial cable, if it is used a serial connection.

−

Connect using a modem, if it is used a modem connection.

−

Connect using local area network, if it is used a connection realized by means of Ethernet network.

Warning. If the operator selects the Connect using direct serial cable option pushbutton or the Connect using a modem ones, IMMEDIATELY AFTER the program installation, EXECUTE the specific checks. 5. At the end of the procedure, the system displays a message concerning the result of the installation procedure. If at the step 4.b the user has activated the box:

12

The code is composed by groups of letters/digits subdivided by a dash (-). Type a group into each space (text box) starting from l.h. side towards r.h. side. 13

Warning. If a part of the help on-line is not available for the selected language, the installation program will install such a part of the help on-line in English language.

10


•

Subnetwork Craft Terminal , on the desktop it will be displayed the Subnetwork Craft Terminal icon and, into the start-up group, the command with the same name 14.

•

Alarm & Performance Monitoring, on the desktop it will be displayed the Alarm & Performance Monitoring icon and the Alarm & Performance Viewer icon and, into the startup group, the commands with the same names 14. The selection of the first icon/command opens the Alarm & Performance Monitoring window. Its description and using mode are reported into the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on-line guide/manual. The selection of the second icon/option opens the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window. Its description and using mode are reported into the Tools – Monitoring file Viewer paragraph and into the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on-line guide/manual.

Warning. It is always possible to exit from the installation program. If the operator commands the exit from the installation procedure before its end, the program will not be correctly installed. In such a case, before running the program itself, it will be necessary to execute again the installation procedure.

Checks and operations to be executed after the first installation of the SCT/LMT program The SCT/LMT program can be connected to the equipment by means of the following different modes: •

via Ethernet network

•

via serial cable

•

via USB cable Warning. This connection is available for the ALS, PDH-AL-C and PDH-AL SIAE equipment 15.

•

via modem

Warning. According to the connection type to be used, it will be necessary to execute some checks and some operations just after having installed the program.

Connection through Ethernet network If the operator wants to use this type of connection, it is not necessary to execute checks or settings.

Serial connection or connection through modem If the operator wants to use this type o f connection, it is necessary to execute some settings. According to the available operating system, execute the indications reported into the specific paragraph: •

Windows NT

•

Windows 95, 98, ME

•

Windows XP

•

Windows 2000

Warning. The commands, the messages, the names of the windows and of the o ptions used into the procedure refer to the Microsoft Windows programs in English.

14

After having executed the program installation, the option will be contained into the group set during the program installation procedure (default group Start - Programs - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - …). 15

Except for the PDH-AL equipment with controller D12031.


11

USB connection If this type of connection is used, it will be necessary to make some settings. Siae microelectronics supports the USB connection for the operating system: •

Windows XP/2000

Warning. The commands, the messages, the name of the windows and of the options used in the procedure refer to the Microsoft Windows progr ams in English.

Microsoft Windows NT 1. Check the presence of the Dial-Up Networking option into the accessories of Windows (select Start - Programs - Accessories), on the contrary, execute its installation 16. 2. Set the default modem used by Windows: a. Select Start - Settings - Control Panel . b. Into the Control Panel window, choose the Modems icon. The system displays the Modems Properties window. c. Select the Add push-button. The system displays the Install New Modem window. d. Activate the Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list box and choose the Next push-button. e. Select the Have Disk... push-button. The system displays the Install From Disk window. f.

Select the Browse push-button. The system displays the Locate File window.

g. Into the Application Path Open push-button.

17

\ Drv path, select the DirectConn.inf file and choose the

The selected file and path are displayed into the Copy manufacturer’s files from box of the Install From Disk window. h. Choose the OK push-button. Into the Models list of the Install New Modem window, it is pointed out the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment option. i.

Choose the Next push-button. Into the You have selected the following modem box, it has to be pointed out the PPPDirect connection to siae equipment option.

j.

Select the Selected ports option push-button and choose the serial port (COM) used for the connection with the modem.

k. Choose the Next push-button and into the next window, the Finish push-button. l.

Into the Modems Properties window, select the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment option and choose the Properties push-button. The system displays the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window.

m. Into the Maximum speed box (General card), set the value 38400. n. Bring at front the Connection card and check that the values of the connection parameters are the following ones: Data bits -> 8, Parity -> None, Stop bits -> 1, on the contrary set them as above pointed out. o. Choose the Advanced push-button. The system displays the Advanced Connection Settings window.

16

To install the Dial-Up Networking, refer to the Windows documentation.

17

Application Path: directory where it has been installed the SCT/LMT program.

12


p. Deactivate the Use flow control check box and choose OK. q. Into the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window, choose OK. r. Into the Modems Properties window, choose Close. The system displays the message: Dial-Up N etworking needs to be configured because the list .....Would you like to do this now? 18 s. Choose Yes. The system displays the Remote Access Setup window. 3. Activate the remote access service (RAS): a. If at step 2.r, the system has not displayed the message Dial-Up Networking..., to open the Remote Access Setup window, execute the following procedure: −

Select Start - Setting - Control Panel .

−

Into the Control Panel window, choose the Network icon. The system displays the Network window.

−

Bring at front the Services card and, into the Network Services list, highlights the Remote Access Service option. If such an option is not present into the list, execute its installation by means of the Add push-button 19.

−

Choose the Properties push-button. The system displays the Remote Access Setup window.

b. Into the Remote Access Setup window. highlight the line COM.. PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment ... and select the Configure push-button. The system displays the Configure Port Usage window. c. Activate the Dial out only option push-button and choose OK. d. Into the Remote Access Setup window, choose the Network push-button. The system displays the Network Configuration window. e. Activate the TCP/IP check box, deactivate the remaining ones and choose OK. f.

Into the Remote Access Setup window, choose the Continue push-button.

g. Into the Network window, choose the Close push-button. The system displays the message: You must shut down and restart your computer... Do you want to restart yo ur computer now? h. Choose Yes. The PC is started up again. 4. Configure the Dial-Up Networking entry: a. Select Start - Programs - Accessories - Dial-Up Networking. The system displays the Dial-Up Networking window. b. Select the More push-button and then the Edit entry and modem properties command. The system displays the Edit Phonebook Entry window. c. Into the Dial using box (Basic card), set the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment (COM..) option. d. Press the Configure push-button. The system displays the Modem Configuration window. e. Execute the following settings: −

Initial speed (bps) field -> 38400.

−

Enable hardware flow control field -> d eactivate.

−

Enable modem error control field -> d eactivate.

−

Enable modem compression box -> deactivate.

18

It is possible that the system does not display the message, in this case continue the procedure execution starting from step 3. If the system does not display the message, it is not prevented the correct execution of the operation. 19

To install the service refer to the Windows documentation.


13

−

f.

Disable modem speaker box -> deactivate.

Press the OK push-button.

g. Into the Edit Phonebook Entry window, bring at front the Server card. h. Into the Dial-up server type field, set the PPP: Windows NT, Windows 95 Plus, Internet option. i. j.

Into the Network protocols area, activate the TCP/IP box and deactivate the remaining ones. Press the TCP/IP Settings... push-button. The system displays the PPP TCP/IP Settings window.

k. Activate the Server assigned IP address and Server assigned name server addresses option push-buttons. l.

Deactivate the Use IP header compression box.

m. Activate the Use default gateway on remote network box. n. Press the OK push-button. o. Into the Edit Phonebook Entry window, press the OK push-button. p. Into the Dial-Up Networking window, press the Close push-button.

Microsoft Windows 95, 98, ME 1. Check that the Remote Access option is present into the Windows accessories (select Start Programs - Accessories), on the contrary, execute its installation 20. 2. Set the default modem used by Windows: a. Select Start - Settings - Control Panel . b. Into the Control Panel window, choose the Modems icon. The system displays the Modems Properties window. c. Select the Add push-button. The system displays the Install New Modem window. d. Activate the Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list box and choose the Next push-button. e. Select the Have Disk... push-button. The system displays the Install From Disk window. f.


g. Into the path Application Path Open push-button.

17

\ Dvr, select the DirectConn.inf file and choose the

The selected file and path are displayed into the Copy manufacturer’s files from box of the Install From Disk window. h. Choose the OK push-button. Into the Models list of the Install New Modem window, the system points out the PPPDirect connection to siae equipment option. i.


j.


k. Choose the Next push-button and, into the next window, the Finish one.

20

To install the Remote Access, refer to the Windows documentation.

14


l.

Into the Modems Properties window, select the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment option and choose the Properties push-button. The system displays the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window.

m. Into the Maximum speed box (General card ), set the value 38400. n. Bring at front the Connection card and check that the value of the connection parameters is the following one: Data bits -> 8, Parity -> None, Stop bits -> 1, on the contrary set them as pointed out. o. Choose the Advanced push-button. The system displays the Advanced Connection Settings window. p. Deactivate the Use flow control check box and choose OK. q. Into the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window, choose OK. r. Into the Modems Properties window, choose Close. 3. Configure the Remote Access entry: a. Select Start - Programs - Accessories - Remote Access. The system displays the Remote Access window. b. If it is present the LctDirectPPP icon, go to the next step. If it is not pr esent the LctDirectPPP icon: −

Select the Make New Connection option. The system displays the Make New Connection window.

−

Into the text box, type the LctDirectPPP option (case sensitive).

−

Select the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment peripheral device and press Next.

−

Type the prefix (Area code) and the phone number (Telephone number) connected with the modem and press Next.

−

Check that the connection name is the correct one and select the Finish pushbutton.

c. Select the LctDirectPPP icon. d. By means of the mouse R.H. push-button, open the contextual menu and select the Properties command. The system displays the LctDirectPPP window. e. Into the General card, check that, into the Dial using field, it is set the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment (COM..) option, on the contrary select such an option. f.

Bring at front the Connection card and check that the value of the connection parameters is the following one: Data bits -> 8, Parity -> None, Stop bits -> 1, on the contrary set them as pointed out, then choose OK.

g. Into the Remote Access window, press the Configure push-button. The system displays the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window. h. Bring at front the Server card. i.

Into the Dial-up server type field, set the PPP: Windows NT, Windows 95 Plus, Internet option.

j.

Into the Network protocols area, activate the TCP/IP box and deactivate the remaining ones.

k. Press the TCP/IP Settings... push-button. The system displays the PPP TCP/IP Settings window. l.

Activate the Server assigned IP address and Server assigned name server addresses option push-buttons.

m. Deactivate the Use IP header compression box. n. Activate the Use default gateway on remote network box. o. Press the OK push-button. p. Into the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window, press the OK push-button. q. Into the Remote Access window, press the Close push-button.


15

Microsoft Windows XP 1. Set the default modem used by Windows: a. Select Start – Control Panel

21

.

b. Into the Control Panel window, choose the Phone and Modem options icon. The system displays the Phone and Modem Options window. c. Bring at front the Modems card and select the Add push-button. The system displays the Install new modem window. d. Activate the Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list box and choose the Next push-button. e. Select the Have Disk... push-button. The system displays the Install From Disk window. f.



17


The selected file and path are displayed into the Copy manufacturer’s files from box of the Install From Disk window. h. Choose the OK push-button. Into the Models list of the Install New Modem window, the system points out the PPPDirect connection to siae equipment option. i.


j.


k. Choose the Next push-button. l.

If the system displays a message that points out that the software, to be installed for the PPP_Direct connection to siae equipment hardware, does not have passed the testing of the Windows Logo program etc., select the Continue Anyway push-button.

m. Choose the Finish push-button. n. Into the Phone and Modem Options window – Modem card, select the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment option and choose the Properties push-button. The system displays the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window. o. Into the Maximum Port Speed box (Modem card ), set the value 38400. p. Bring at the front the Advanced card and select the Change Default Preferences push-button. The system displays the PPP_Direct connection to siae Preferences window. q. Into the Flow Control box (General card), set the value None. r. Bring at the front the Advanced card and check that the value of the connection parameters is the following one: Data bits -> 8, Parity -> None, Stop bits -> 1, on the contrary set them as pointed out. s. Choose OK. t.

Into the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window, choose OK.

u. Into the Phone and Modem Options window, choose Ok. 2. Configure the Remote Access entry: a. Select Start – Connect to – Show all connections 22.

21

For Windows XP in Classic Start Menu mode (Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window ) select Start – Setting – Control Panel . 22

For Windows XP in Classic Start Menu mode (Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window ): −

16

Select Start – Setting – Control Panel .


The system displays the Network Connections window. b. If it is present the LctDirectPPP icon, go to the next step. If it is not pr esent the LctDirectPPP icon: −

Select the Create a new Connection option. The system displays the New Connection Wizard window.

−

Choose the Next push-button.

−

Select the Connect to the Internet option push-button and choose Next.

−

Select the Set up my connection manually option push-button and choose Next.

−

Select the Connect using a dial-up modem option push-button and choose Next.

−

Into the ISP Name box, type LctDirectPPP (case sensitive) and press Next.

−

Into the Phone number box, type a generic number with three digits (for instance 123) and choose Next.

−

Deactivate the Turn on internet connection firewall for this connection box and choose Next (it is not necessary to insert the data relevant to the username and password).

−

Select the Finish push button.

c. Select the LctDirectPPP icon. d. By means of the mouse R.H. push-button, open the contextual menu and select the Properties command. The system displays the LctDirectPPP Properties window. e. Into the General card, check that, into the Connect using field, it is set the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment (COM..) option, on the contrary select such an option. f.

Verify that a number of three digits is set into the Phone number field; otherwise, type three numbers as you like into the text-field.

g. Press the Configure push-button. The system displays the Modem Configuration window. h. Into the Maximum Speed (bps) box, set the value 38400. i. j.

Deactivate the Enable hardware flow control box and press OK. Bring at front the Networking card.

k. Into the Type of dial-up server I am calling: field, set the PPP: Windows 95/98/NT4/2000/Internet option. l.

Into the This connection uses the following items area, activate the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) box and deactivate the remaining ones.

m. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) option and press the Properties... push-button. The system displays the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. n. Activate the Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically option push-buttons. o. Press the Advanced push-button. The system displays the Advanced TCP/IP Settings window. p. Into the General card, deactivate the Use IP header compression box. q. Activate the Use default gateway on remote network box and press the OK pushbutton. r. Into the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window press the OK push-button. s. Into the LctDirectPPP Properties window, bring at front the Advanced card. t.

Deactivate the Protect my computer and network by limiting… box.

u. Into the LctDirectPPP Properties window choose Ok.

The system displays the Control Panel window. −

Select the Network Connections icon.


17

Microsoft Windows 2000 1. Set the default modem used by Windows: a. Select Start - Settings - Control Panel . b. Into the Control Panel window, choose the Phone and Modem options icon. The system displays the Phone And Modem Options window. c. Bring at front the Modems card and select the Add push-button. The system displays the Install new modem window. d. Activate the Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list box and choose the Next push-button. e. Select the Have Disk... push-button. The system displays the Install From Disk window. f.



17


The selected file and path are displayed into the Copy manufacturer’s files from box of the Install From Disk window. h. Choose the OK push-button. Into the You have selected the following modem: box, the system points out the PPPDirect connection to siae equipment option. i. j.

Select the Selected ports option push-button and choose the serial port (COM) used for the connection with the modem. Choose the Next push-button.

k. Choose the Finish push-button. l.

Into the Phone and Modem Options window – Modem card, select the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment option and choose the Properties push-button. The system displays the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window.

m. Into the Maximum speed box (General card ), set the value 38400. n. Bring at the front the Advanced card and select the Change Default Preferences push-button. The system displays the PPP_Direct connection to siae Preferences window. o. Into the Flow Control box (General card), set the value None. p. Bring at the front the Advanced card and check that the value of the connection parameters is the following one: Data bits -> 8, Parity -> None, Stop bits -> 1, on the contrary set them as pointed out. q. Choose OK. r. Into the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment Properties window, choose OK. s. Into the Phone and Modem Options window, choose Ok. 2. Configure the Remote Access entry: a. Select Start - Settings - Network and Dial-up Connections. The system displays the Network and Dial-up Connections window. b. If it is present the LctDirectPPP icon, go to the next step. If it is not present the LctDirectPPP icon: −

Select the Make New Connection option. The system displays the Network Connection Wizard window.

18

−

Choose the Next push-button.

−

Select the Dial-up to the Internet option push-button and choose Next.

−

Select the I want to set up my Internet connection manually, or I want to connect through a local area network (LAN) option push-button and choose Next.

−

Select the I connect through a phone line and a modem option push-button and choose Next.


−

Select the modem to be used an press Next

−

Type the prefix (Area code) and the phone number (Telephone number) connected with the modem and press Next.

−

Choose Next (it is not necessary to insert the data relevant to the username and password).

−

Into the Connection name box, type the LctDirectPPP option (case sensitive) and press Next

−

At the question “Do you want to set up an Internet mail account now?”, select the No option push-button and press Next

−

Select the Finish push button.

c. Select the LctDirectPPP icon. d. By means of the mouse R.H. push-button, open the contextual menu and select the Properties command. The system displays the LctDirectPPP Properties window. e. Into the General card, check that, into the Connect using field, it is set the PPP-Direct connection to siae equipment (COM..) option, on the contrary select such an option. f.

Press the Configure push-button. The system displays the Modem Configuration window.

g. Into the Maximum Speed (bps) box, set the value 38400. h. Deactivate the Enable hardware flow control box and press OK. i. j.

Bring at front the Networking card. Into the Type of dial-up server I am calling: field, set the PPP: Windows 95/98/NT4/2000,Internet option.

k. Into the Components checked are used by this connection: area, activate the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) box and deactivate the remaining ones. l.

Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) option and press the Properties... push-button. The system displays the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.

m. Activate the Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically option push-buttons. n. Press the Advanced push-button. The system displays the TCP/IP Advanced Settings window. o. Into the General card, deactivate the Use IP header compression box. p. Activate the Use default gateway on remote network box and press the OK pushbutton. q. Into the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window press the OK push-button. r. Into the LctDirectPPP Properties window choose Ok.

Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 1. Connect the PC to the equipment by means of the USB cable. The Found New Hardware. USB Device windows opens. 2. Wait for some seconds. The Found New Hardware Wizard windows opens. 3. Select the Search for the best driver in these location option push-button. 4. Activate the Install from a list or a specific location (Advanced) check-box. 5. Select the Next push-button. 6. Activate the Include this location in the search push-button 7. In the Application Path 23 \ Drv\Usb\WinXp_Win2k path, select the ConnUSBdirect file.

23

Application Path: directory where it has been installed the SCT/LMT program.


19

8. Press the Next push-button. 9. If the Hardware Installation windows opens, The software you area installing for this hardware: Mic Connection USB ModemDirect has not passed Windows XP Logo testing to v erify its compatibility... Select the Continue Anyway push-button. The message of end-operation is displayed. 10. Press Finish.

Warning. No other settings are necessary. In order to verify the correct USB setting, verify the presence of the Mic Connection USB modem Direct 24 (Control Panel - … Modem Options) device. If you have o ther connections configured on the PC, execute the following check: 1. Select the Options command (SCT/LMT window ). The Options windows opens. 2. Bring the Connection tab in foreground. 3. Select the Connect using direct serial cable or Connect using a modem option push-button according to the type of connection you wish to execute. 4. Selecting the Settings push-button located next to the selected push-button. The LctDirectPPP Properties

25

windows opens.

5. Verify that in the Connect Using box (General tab ), the Mic Connection USB ModemDirect (COM…) device is set , otherwise select the device pointed out in the list. 6. Press Ok.

Warning. If other connections are available (for example, serial connections), it is necessary that only the USB connection is active. Then, deactivate the other ones. If you pass from the USB connection to the serial connection, verify that the Flow Control parameter is inactive. If not, deactivate the parameter.

Updating of the SCT/LMT program and/or of the LCT additional modules and/or of the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program 26 It is always possible to update the SCT/LMT program and/or the LCT additional modules and/or the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program or to add to the subject SCT/LMT program another LCT additional module for the management of a new type of Siae equipment 27. Warning. The updating of the SCT/LMT program or of an LCT additional module does not affect the information stored into the hard disk of the PC (alarm history, connection parameters, etc.). Such information are not loosen but they will be available into the new version without needing for any conversion or restore operation.

24

Warning. The device is present only when the USB cable is present.

25

For the description and the usage modality of the window, refer to the Windows on-line guide.

26

Warning. For the updating of the PMP Master program, for the management of the PMP systems and of the LOM ELFO program for the management of the ELFO radio equipment, refer to the indications reported into the specific on-line guide/manual. 27

Select the Help - About… option, it is possible to check the list and the version of the LCT modules installed on the actually used machine.

20


To update the SCT/LMT and/or Alarm & Performance Monitoring program and/or LCT module or add the new LCT module 1. Start up Windows. 2. Close all the application programs actually running as the ones open on the desktop as the ionised ones. 3. Insert the floppy disk or CD, supplied by Siae Microelettronica, into the relevant unit. 4. Select the Start box and the Run command. It is displayed the Run dialogue window. 5. Into the text box, type a:\setup.exe. 6. Choose OK. At the end of the procedure, a proper message informs the user about the result of the installation.


21

3.

START UP OF THE SCT/LMT PROGRAM

1. Select the Subnetwork Craft Terminal icon/option

28

.

The system displays the SCT/LMT window.

Warning. At the program start-up, it is possible to get the automatic activation of the connection with a defined equipment. More detailed information are reported into the Automatic activation of the connection paragraph.

28

After having executed the installation of the SCT/LMT program, the Subnetwork Craft Terminal option will be contained into the group set during the program installation: default group: Start Programs - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Subnetwork Craft Terminal (English version of Windows).

22


4.

SCT/LMT WINDOW

At the SCT/LMT program starting up, it is displayed on the screen the relative main windows. The Figure 1 shows an example 29. Warning. The SCT/LMT graphical interface (Subnetwork Craft Terminal or Link Manager Terminal window) has been developed to be used in Microsoft Windows ambient , then it respects the conventions - relevant to the positions of the menus, to the window type, to the keyboard use, to he mouse use and so on - typical of such an operating system.

Figure 1

29

The figure shows how the Subnetwork Craft Terminal window appears when the connection with the equipment has been activated.


23

4.1

Title bar

Into the title bar, it is reported: •

the program name. With details, the wording: −

Subnetwork Craft Terminal , points out the application program able to manage up to a maximum of 100 equipment.

−

Link Manager Terminal , points out the application program able to manage up to a maximum of 2 equipment.

Warning. The two application programs, with the exception of the maximum number of equipment that can be managed, are equipped with the same options and with the same operating functions. •

the program version/distribution (Ver…).

4.2

Menu bar

Into the menu bar, it is present the following option: •

File, it contains the Exit command to close the SCT/LMT window. Warning. If it has been activated the connection with at least one equipment, the program asks for the operation confirmation.

•

Help, it contains the following options: −

Contents and Search, they allow accessing to the help on-line of the program.

−

How to use Help, it provides information concerning the use of the helps on-line provided with the SCT/LMT program and the LCT modules.

−

Technical Support, it provides information concerning the Technical Support provided by Siae Microelettronica.

−

About... 30, it allows to the user to check the version of the SCT/LMT program the additional software modules installed on his own PC. The Table 1 points out the details concerning the additional modules Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program 33.

31

and of

32

relevant to the

The choice of the System Info push-button allows displaying the information concerning the computer. −

Program Database Information, it opens the window with the same name. Such a window lists the database files (Database File Name column) of the program and the relevant version.

30

About Subnetwork Craft Terminal (SCT interface), About Link Manager Terminal (LMT interface).

31

The program version can be checked also at the program starting-up and into the title bar.

32

Warning. The remaining modules are general elements of the program used by one or more equipment types. 33

The version of each module can be checked into the lower bar of the specific equipment interface (RadioSDH window, RadioPDH window, CommServer window, etc.)

24


Table 1 Details concerning the additional modules of the SIAE equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program File Name

Description

Additional module

Equipment

CommServer.dll

LCT for Communication Server

LCT CS

CommServer-S

LctAdm.dll

LCT for ADM series

LCT ADM-C

ADM-C equipment

LctEasylink.dll

LCT for Easylink series

LCT EL

G series radio equipment

LctUSRadio.dll

LCT US Radio

LCT US

US radio equipment

LctAccesslink.dll

LCT for PDH-AL

LCT PDH-AL

AL series radio equipment

PmpLom.dll

Component integration

ElfoLom.dll

-

4.3

for

LOM

PMP

-

PMP system

-

ELFO radio equipment

Tools bar

Into the tool bar, there are, as push-buttons, the following menus: •

Connect, contains the commands to activate the connection with every equipment present into the network. If the operation has been successfully executed, the Connect label is replaced with the Disconnect one. The choice of this last option allows deactivating the connection.

•

Login, contains the commands to activate the login with one or more remote equipment present into the Equipment list area.

•

Logout, contains the commands to deactivate the login with one or more remote equipment present into the Equipment list area.

•

Refresh, contains the commands to request the updating of the information present into the Equipment list area.

•

Equipment, contains the commands to check the configuration, composition, functional status etc. of the equipment selected into the Equipment list area.

•

Network, contains the commands for the management of the users that can use the program.

•

Options, contains the commands to customize the program (number of signals that can be stored into the alarm history, connection modes and parameters, etc.).

•

Tools, contains the command to save, open, display, transfer a configuration file, the command for the management of the “remote equipment” list and the command to display the monitoring files (alarms and PM measurements) detected with the Siae Alarm & Performance Monitoring program 34.

Warning. Some push-buttons are characterized by the arrow symbol ( ), the selection of such a symbol opens a pop-up menu that lists the options coupled to such a menu.

34

The Alarm & Performance Monitoring program allows monitoring all the connected equipment and memorizing into a file the results of the PM measurements and the alarms/events. More detailed information concerning the program are reported into the Alarm & Performance Monitoring o n-line guide/manual.


25

4.4

“Station list” area

When the connection with the local equipment has been activated, into the Station list area, the program points out the list of the stations which group the equipment (local and remote ones) present into the “remote equipment” list (Remote Element List) 35 as shown into Figure 2.

The equipment are displayed into the Equipment list area. The contents of this area change, according to the selected station. In fact, when the user selects a station, into the Equipment list area, the program shows only the equipment coupled with such specific station. The functional status of the other connected equipment is pointed out by the resuming boxes of the stations that “contain” the equipment (refer to the notes of Figure 2).

Warning. The station does not have any particular meaning; it has been introduced simply to help the user during the localization of the equipment.

Station name (1)

List of the equipment coupled with the currently selected station

RESUMING funcctional status of the equipment coupled with the station (2)

RESUMING functional status of the stations (3)

"Status change" indication (4)

Figure 2

Notes of Figure 2 (1)

The user defines the name of the station during the setting of the “remote equipment” list, he can change it later. The wording Undefined points out that it has not been assigned any name to the station 36 .

35

The “remote equipment” list is a list that contains all the information concerning the network equipment to which the program has to be connected. Warning. The “remote equipment” list has to be set by the user and it can be increased or changed at every time. The user can save the list into the equipment controller or into a file. 36

Into the Undefined station , it is possible to have present the equipment with the activated connection (local equipment). This situation is present if, into the “remote equipment list” of the local equipment, it has not been inserted the local equipment itself. In such a case, the program does not know to which station it has been coupled the local equipment and, therefore, it will couple it with the Undefined station.

26


(2)

With details, from L.H. side to R.H. one, the box: •

, points out the status of the alarms. The box, according to the severity of the alarms present into the equipment, can get different colours and wordings. With details, the box:

•

−

Green – without wording, points out that the equipment contained into the station does not show alarms.

−

Light blue - wrn, points out that the most serious alarm present into the equipment, contained into the station, has Warning severity.

−

Yellow – min, points out that the most serious alarm present into the equipment, contained into the station, has Minor severity.

−

Orange – maj, points out that the most serious alarm present into the equipment, contained into the station, has Major severity.

−

Red – crt, points out that the most serious alarm present into the equipment, contained into the station, has Critical severity.

mop, points out the activation of manual forcing operations (for instance a loop). With details, the box: −

−

•

−

(3)

Light blue - mop, points out that at least one equipment contained into the station has an active manual forcing.

dwl , points out if the updating of the software/firmware (sw/fw) is on progress. With details, the box: −

•

Green – mop, points out that the equipment contained into the station does not have any active manual forcing.

Green – dwl, points out that no one equipment contained into the station is executing the updating of the sw/fw. Light blue - dwl, points out that at least one equipment contained into the station is executing the updating of the sw/fw.

tmo, points out the connection status. With details, the box: −

Green – tmo, points out that no one equipment contained into the station is in disconnected status.

−

Red - tmo, points out that at least one equipment contained into the station is in disconnected status.

The description of the boxes is the same one pointed out at point (2). In this case, the status of the boxes points out the resuming status of all the equipment present into all the stations.

(4)

The flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*) on the side of the name of a station, points out that at least one of the boxes of the station under examination has changed status (it has switched from activated to deactivated or vice versa). For instance, Let us suppose that into the Station A station (refer to Figure 2) the dwl box is activated (box with light blue color); the program points out the deactivation of the box (status change – it switches its color from light blue to green), through the flashing of the Acknowledge push button and of the symbol (*) on the side of the Station A wording. The user can deactivate (and then activate again) this function, define the frequency of the flashing and the “status changes” that cause the flashing (refer to Acknowledge card ). Warning. Press the Acknowledge push-button, to stop the flashing of the push-button itself and to remove the symbol (*).

Warning. If the user activates the connection with an equipment and the remote equipment list of such an equipment had been set through the release 1.0 of the SCT/LMT program, the Undefined station contains all the equipment present into the list. The user can reorganize the remote equipment list by means of the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command.


27

4.5

“Equipment list” area

Into the Equipment list area, only when it has been activated the connection with the local, it is pointed out the functioning status of the local equipment and of the remote ones present into the “equipment remote” list.

As “local equipment”, it is intended every equipment present into the network to which the user has asked for the connection. When the local equipment has been connected, it communicates to the program its functioning status then, it makes available for the user the functioning status of all the equipment of the network to which the user itself is directly or indirectly connected (remote equipment) and present into the Remote Equipment List 37. When an equipment has been connected, the user can check the functioning status, the detail of the current alarms , the version of the equipment software/firmware, the composition, the features, the results of the performance measurements (if such ones have been activated), the connection parameters, open the LCT interface and check the configuration parameters (status of the connected/monitor equipment). To operate directly on the equipment management 38 opening the LCT interface and checking the configuration parameters, it is necessary to ask for the “login” that is the equipment access (connected/login equipment status 39). For the local equipment, the login request is automatically forwarded when it is requested the connection. For the remote equipment, the login request has to be for warded by the user. Then, it is possible to deactivate the access to the equipment (logout). This command can be forwarded to every remote equipment in connected/login status but not to the local equipment.

Warning. Into the Equipment list area, the program displays ONLY the equipment present into the station selected into the Station list area, as shown in Figure 3. In fact the contents of the area under examination change according to the selected station. For instance, in Figure 3, the program points out only the equipment coupled with the Station B. The functional status of the other equipment present into the “remote equipment” list connected with the program, is pointed out by the resuming boxes of the station to which the equipment are coupled. To display the record relevant to a specific equipment, select the relevant station before.

Warning. The user can couple one equipment to one station only.

37

The “remote equipment list” is a list that contains all the information concerning the network equipment to which the program has to be connected. Warning. The user has to set the “remote equipment” list and it can be increased or changed at every moment. The user can save the list into the equipment controller or into a file. 38

Warning. The commands and the operations that can be executed by every SCT/LMT user are defined by his user profile. 39

Warning. In this status, it is possible to execute also all the operations available when the equipment is in connected/monitor status.

28


Figure 3


When an equipment is in connected status (login or monitor), the relevant record shows the following information: •

“Latch” symbol. Possibility configuration. The symbol: − −

to

execute

every

changes

into

the

equipment

, points out that the SCT/LMT user can change the configuration parameters. , points out that the SCT/LMT user (independently from his profile) can not change any configuration parameter of the equipment. In this case, the system does not provide, for the SCT/LMT user, the possibility to execute the equipment login 40.

The enabling for the changing of the parameters is set by network element manager (Siae NMS5UX supervision system). •

Alarm Summary/ManOP/... field. Functional status of the equipment. When the box: −

Critical is red, it points out that it is activated at least one alarm with Critical level.

−

Major is orange, it points out that it is activated at least one alarm with Major level.

−

Minor is yellow, it points o ut that it is activated at least one alarm with Minor level.

−

Warning is blue, it points out that it is activated at least one alarm with Warning level.

−

ManOp is blue, it points out that it is activated a manual forcing (for instance a loop).

−

Dwload is blue, it points out that the firmware updating is on pr ogress.

The absence of alarms, of manual forcing or of download ones on progress is represented by the green box. •

.../Station field. It is the network identification of the equipment. If it has not been identified any identification name, it points out the equipment IP address (agent SNMP).

•

Equipment Type field. It is the Siae equipment type

41

. The wording:

−

RadioSDH, points out the US (Urban Synchronous link) manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

radio equipment

−

SDH IDU-C, points out the US radio equipment (Compact version) manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

40

Warning. This situation is present if the equipment to be connected/logged-in is managed also by the NMS5UX Siae supervisory system, because the NMS5UX user has the possibility to prevent, for the SCT/LMT user, the connection/login of an equipment. 41

Warning. If a remote equipment switches from connected (login or monitor) to disconnected status, during the connection r e-trying attempts, the system lets displayed, into the column, the last known value.


29

−

RadioSDH Eth Lan, points out the US radio equipment with Lan interfaces manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

−

RadioSDH 63x2Mb, points out the 63x2Mb/s US radio equipment manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

−

ADM-C, points out the ADM-C (Add Drop Multiplexer - Compact) multiplexer equipment manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

−

RadioPDH, points out the Easylink series radio equipment manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

−

RadioPDH-AL, points out the Access Link series radio equipment manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

−

PDH-AL-C, points out the Access Link series radio equipment (Compact version) manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

−

ELFO, points out the ELFO (EasyLink Full Outdoor) radio equipment manufactured by Siae Microelettronica.

−

PMP 60/120, points Microelettronica.

−

CommServer, points Microelettronica.

out out

the

60/120

the

PMP

system

CommServer-S

manufactured

manufactured

by by

Siae Siae

The wording MIB vers…, positioned after the equipment type, points out the MIB version (Management Information Base). Warning. If the system does not point out the MIB version, it means that the relevant value is not available into the MIB loaded on the equipment under examination. •

Login field. It is the login/monitor status of the equipment. Then, in login status, it is pointed out the profile of the user who has executed the request. With details, the wording: −

Read only, Read and write, Station operator or System, points out that the equipment is in connected/login status and that the user, who has requested the login, has respectively a profile of Read only, Read and write, Station operator or System type.

−

Monitor, points out that the equipment is in connected/monitor status.

(2)

The record, relevant to the local equipment, is identified by the wording (Local) present into the Login field; usually the local equipment is represented by the first record of the list.

(3)

The records, of the remote equipment, are identified by the absence of the wording (Local) into the Login field. While, the wording (Remote Link) points out the element, set into the “remote equipment list”, placed on the other side of the local equipment-remote equipment hop.

(4)

After having activated the connection, it is possible that the connection is temporarily interrupted, that the user asks for the data updating, etc. These situations are pointed out into the Equipment list area through the displaying of the following wordings into the Alarm Summary/ManOP/Station field: • •

Connecting. Transitory status; it means that it is on progress the first connection. No response. Transitory status; it means that the equipment has not answered to the first connection attempt.

•

Retry connection. Transitory status; It means that a re-connection attempt is on progress 42.

•

Timed Out . Transitory status; it means that the equipment has not forwarded the answer to the connection attempt into the set time-out time 42.

•

Refreshing. Transitory status; it means that the information updating is on progress. The updating request is forwarded by the user by means of the Refresh menu.

•

Disabled by user . Permanent status; it means that the remote equipment has been disabled by the user (by means of the Disable command). In this condition, the program stops the dialogue with the equipment or the reconnection attempts.

•

Authentication fail . Permanent status; it means that during the connection or the reconnection attempt of a remote equipment, the network password inserted by user,

42

The times and the connection and re-connection modes can be set by the user.

30


during the connection procedure has not been considered as a valid one or it generally points out an error during the connection. •

No Route to Host . Permanent status; it means that the program is not able to forward the data to the equipment because it does not have all the requested information to reach such an equipment. This situation occurs, for instance, when the equipment that has to be connected does not belong to the same network of the machine where it is installed the SCT/LMT program and the user has not defined a machine that acts as a gateway between the two networks.

•

Login Time Out . Permanent status; it points out that it is expired the possible timeout coupled with the user or that the SCT/LMT user with System profile or the NMS5UX user has forced the logout of the user under examination. The user logout corresponds to the disconnection of the relevant equipment.

•

Too many users. Permanent status; it points out the equipment is already connected with the maximum number of users 43. Press the Refresh menu to check if one connection is “available”. If one connection is available, the equipment switches in connected/monitor status, on the contrary, it remains in Too Many User status.

Warning. The disconnection (also the temporary one) of the local equipment causes the automatic disconnection of all the remote equipment 44.

4.6

“Alarm history log” area

Into the Alarm history log area, it is displayed the history 45 of the alarm 46 and status 47 signals relevant to all the equipment present into the network and actually connected or that have been connected to the SCT/LMT program. The Alarm history log area is always present into the SCT/LMT window, and it is represented in Figure 4.

43

Warning. At each single equipment, it is possible to connect at the same time 6 users. The sixth user can require for the login only, if he has the System profile. For instance, if 5 users are connected, in connected/login status, to an equipment and an additional user, with Read only profile (or Read and Write or Station Operator one ), requires for the connection, the equipment does not allows the execution of such an operation. On the contrary, if the connection has been requested by a user with System profile (SYSTEM or NMS5UX user ), the equipment accepts the request. It is possible to check the number and the profile of the users connected to the equipment, opening the Logged User Viewer window. 44

This could be valid if the remote equipment are physically connected with the SCT/LMT program, through the local network (LAN). 45

As “history” , it is intended the list of the signals acquired and stored by the program during the time. 46

The word “alarm” means the signal of a failure created by an error or by a malfunctioning of the equipment or of one of its elements. Warning. Into the alarm history, it is stored as the detection signal as the alarm reset one. 47

The word “status”, on the contrary, identifies the signals that refer to every event that does not point out a malfunctioning but a status change, an operation on progress or a functioning indication. The status signals can be communicated from the equipment to the program (into the description, such ones will be called status signals) or it can be the program itself to create such signals (into the description, such ones will be called event signals), for instance, each time that the system executes the connection or the disconnection of an equipment, the SCT/LMT stores and displays a signal into the Alarm history log. Warning. The status signals are stored as into the alarm history of the equipment as into the one makes available by the SCT/LMT. On the contrary, the event signals are recorded only into the alarm history of the SCT/LMT and not into the equipment one.


31

By means of the elements present into the Alarm history log window, it is possible: •

to delete from the Alarm history log area and from the PC disk one or more signals The program stores on the PC disk all the information up to a limit “N” (number comprised between 100 and 10000) that can be set b y the user. The signals remain stored on the PC disk and displayed into the Alarm history log area until when the user does not remove them or until when, after it has been reached the “N” limit of storable records, the oldest signals are progressively overwritten by the new ones.

•

to “inspect” one or more signals In such a way, the program stores that the user has seen the signal.

•

to save on a file the signals The contents of the so created file can be displayed with every text editor.

•

to repair and to compress the information present into the database of the SCT/LMT program Warning. At the program start-up, the system automatically executes the subject operation.

•

to filter the list of the signal stored on the PC disk and displayed into the Alarm history log area The operation consists of defining one or more selection criteria in such a way that the system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria. Warning. The setting of the filters remains valid until when the operator closes the SCT program.

•

to deactivate (and activate again) the displaying of the signals into the Alarm history log area Warning. The command affects only the displaying and not the storing of the signals on the hard disk of the PC.

•

to insert a reference note (bookmark) between two records

•

To display the alarm log memorized into the equipment controller. The log read by equipment is memorized into the PC disk, and it remains available for the successive consultations executed by the user. The alarm log can be saved into a file, then, the list of the signals memorized by the equipment can be deleted or filtered. The procedures to execute all the above mentioned operations are reported at the paragraph N.E. Logger menu.

•

To display the list of the operations executed by the SCT/LMT users (command log), memorized into the equipment controller. The system memorizes the command log into the disk of the PC and it remains available for the successive consultations executed by the user. The alarm log can be saved into a file, then, the list of the signals memorized by the equipment can be deleted or filtered. The procedures to execute all the above mentioned operations are reported at the paragraph Cmd Logger menu. Warning. The operation is available only for the equipment of PDH-AL type.

Figure 4

32



The alarm, status and event signals are displayed as a list. To every signal present into this area, it is dedicated a record that contains the following information: •

ACK/.... I records can be “seen” by the user. The ACK field (that is represented by a box) points out the “vision” status of the record. With details: −

, the signal has not been seen.

−

, the signal has been seen.

The records can be “seen” through the Acknowledgment command or selecting the box. Warning. After having “seen” a record, it is not possible to cancel the operation. •

.../Sev . This field (represented by a colored box and by a wording) points out if the record refers to a status or alarm signal and if the signal has been detected or detected/reset. If the record refers to an alarm, it is also pointed out its seriousness level. With details: Color box

Wording

Description

Green

Status

Status or event signal

Blue

Warning

Alarm signal detected with Warning seriousness

Yellow

Minor

Alarm signal detected with Minor seriousness

Orange

Major

Alarm signal detected with Major seriousness

Red

Critical

Alarm signal detected with Critical seriousness

Green with the blue square

Warning

Alarm signal detected/reset with Warning seriousness

Green with the yellow square

Minor

Alarm signal detected/reset with Minor seriousness

Green with the orange square

Major

Alarm signal detected/reset with Major seriousness

Green with the red square

Critical

Alarm signal detected/reset with Critical seriousness

If into the field, there is the symbol (flag), it means that the record refers to a bookmark inserted by the user or automatically by the program 48. •

Date/Time. Date/time of the signal detection 49.

•

Date/Time Cleared . Date/time of the signal reset

•

IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment from which it has been forwarded the signal or to which the signal refers.

•

Network Element. Network identification code of the equipment from which it has been forwarded the signal or to which the signal refers.

49

.

If it has not been set any identification name, the program points out the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment. •

Message. Alphanumeric strings that specifies the signal type. If the record refers to a bookmark, the system points out the relevant text.

(2)

Into the status bar, the program points out the following information: •

Total field, total number of the actually displayed records. If the operator has not activated some filters, this number corresponds to the number of signals actually stored on the PC disk added to the possible bookmarks inserted by the user.

•

Critical, Major, Minor , Warning fields, number of alarm signals detected with Critical, Major, Minor and Warning seriousness level.

•

Status field, number of displayed status or event signals.

•

Cleared field, number of reset alarm signals.

•

Ack field, number of marked signals.

48

For instance, at the activation of the connection, the program inserts the bookmark New Connection(s) session started . 49

The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal itself. The date/time format changes according to the setting executed into its own Windows operating system.


33

•

Filter field, the activation of filters.

Warning. The value pointed out into each field refers only to the single signals displayed into the Alarm history log area. Such a number can also be different from the number of signals really stored on the hard disk of the PC: check if there are some activated filters. The only exception is at the disabling of the signal displaying into the Alarm history log area (the wording Event Viewer Disabled on the right side of the menu bar). In this case, also if the acquired signals are not displayed into the list, the values of the parameters present into the bat are implemented. (3)

When an equipment has been connected to the program and the program itself acquires a new signal, this signal is dynamically added to the list. It is possible updating the information displayed into the Alarm history log, choosing the Refresh command present into the Actions menu. Warning. If during the connection with an equipment, the system does not display the alarms, it is possible that it has been disabled the forwarding of the traps (activated Disable Trap Notification box) at the activation of the connection. To activate again the forwarding of the traps, the user has to disconnect the equipment and to connect them again taking care to deactivate the Disable Trap Notification box.

To delete from the Alarm history log area and from the PC disk one or more signals 1. Into the SCT/LMT window, select the Actions - Delete command. Warning. The command can be displayed also selecting every record into the Alarm history log area and pressing the R.H. push-button of the mouse. The system displays further menu. 2. Choose: •

the Selected command, to delete the record ass.y pointed out with the mouse.

•

the All command, to delete the complete list of the records stored on the PC disk.

The system displays a confirmation window. 3. Press Yes.

To “inspect” one or more signals 1. Into the SCT/LMT window, select the Actions - Acknowledgment command. Warning. The command can be displayed also selecting every record into the Alarm history log area and pressing the R.H. push-button of the mouse. The system displays further menu. 2. Choose: •

the Selected command, to inspect the records selected pointed out with the mouse.

•

the All command, to inspect the complete list of the records stored on the PC disk.

The user can select a record also selecting the Ack box (refer to Figure 4). Warning. After having seen a record, it is not possible to cancel the operation.

To save on a file the signals 1. Into the SCT/LMT window, select the Actions - Export To file command.

34


The system displays the Save Export File window. 2. Into the proper box, type the name of the file (with extension .csv) and set the path where the file has to be saved; by default, the system advises the folder where it has been installed the SCT/LMT program. 3. Choose the Save push-button. The format of the data is the same indicated in Figure 4. Warning. The signalings present in the Alarm History Log area are saved on a file. For example, if filters are active, this operation saves only the signalings present in the Alarm History Log area and not all the signalings stored in the database.

To repair and to compress the information present into the database of the program 1. Into the SCT/LMT window, select the Actions - Repair and Compact Database command. Warning. The command can be displayed also selecting every record into the Alarm history log area and pressing the R.H. push-button of the mouse. The system displays a confirmation window. 2. Press Yes.

To filter the list of the signals 1. Into the SCT/LMT window, select the View - Set Filter command. The system displays the Filter Setup window. Such a window is composed by two screen pages General and Occurred Date/Time. The available criteria into the General screen page are the following ones: •

Match Severity. Into this area, it is possible to select, as a filtering criterion, the signal type and for the alarms, their seriousness. With details: Box

Description

Status (green)

Status or event signal

Warning (blue)


Minor (yellow)


Major (orange)


Critical (red)


To activate the criterion, select the box (), to deactivate it de-select the box (). •

List Cleared . The subject box allows defining, as filtering criterion, the list of the detected/reset signals. To activate the criterion, select the box (), to deactivate it de-select the box ().

•

Match equipment address. In this section, it is possible to define, as a filtering criterion, the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment. To set the criterion, activate the Match equipment address box and type into the box below it the value.

•

Match Network Element ID. In this section, it is possible to define, as a filter, the network identification name of an equipment. To set the criterion, activate the Match Network Element ID box and type into the box below it the identification name of the equipment.

•

Match Acknowledge. In this section, it is possible to define, as a criterion, the marking status of the signal. To set the criterion, activate the b ox under examination and select one of the following option push-buttons: −

Acknowledge push-button: to display only the already seen alarms/events.


35

−

Not Acknowledge push-button: to display only the not already seen alarms/events.

The available criteria into the Occurred Date/Time screen page allow setting, as a filter, the time and the date of the signal. With details, when the operator activates the box: •

•

Before, into the signal list, it will be displayed only the records that have a registration date older than the set one. After , it will be displayed only the records that have a registration date more recent than the set one.

Into both the sections, to set: •

the date select the arrow of the Date box and choose the desired date from the displayed calendar.

•

the time select, into the Time box , the numbers relevant to the time or set the desired value using the arrows. Execute the same operations to set the numbers relevant to the minutes and to the seconds.

2. Choose Apply or OK to activate the filters. The program will displays, into the Alarm history log area, only the records that comply with ALL the activated criteria. Warning. Each time that the operator applies a filter, the program does not consider only the actually displayed records but all the ones stored on the PC disk.

To deactivate/activate the displaying of the signals into the Alarm history log area 1. To deactivate the displaying of the signals, into the SCT/LMT window, select the View Disable Event Viewer command. At the choice of the command, the Disable Event Viewer option is replaced by the Enable Event Viewer one. During the period when it is deactivated the displaying of the signals, the system displays on the right side of the menu bar the wording Event Viewer Disabled . 2. To activate again the displaying of the signals, into the SCT/LMT window, select the View Enable Event Viewer.

To insert a bookmark between two records 1. Into the Alarm history log, select from the list, a record relevant to a signal. The bookmark will be inserted over the selected record. 2. Choose the Bookmark menu. The system displays a dialogue window. Warning. If it has not been selected a bookmark, the program does not allow the operation. 3. Into the text box present in the window. type the sentence to be coupled with the bookmark (alphanumeric string with minimum 1, maximum 100 characters). Warning. It is necessary to type at least one character to create the bookmark. To insert a bookmark with out sentence, type a single “blank” character. 4. Press Ok. The sentence coupled with the bookmark is po inted out into the Message column. Warning. The bookmark is recorded into the alarm history makes available by the SCT/LMT and stored into the hard disk of the PC. The user can not insert a bookmark into the alarm history memorized into the controller of an equipment. Warning. To remove a bookmark, use the Delete command present into the Actions menu.

36


4.6.1

“Alarm history log” area - “N.E. Logger” menu

The N.E. Logger menu, present into the Alarm history log area, allows to read the alarm log stored on the controller of the equipment. The log read from equipment (called Network Element log - NE log) 50 is stored on the hard disk of the PC and it remains available for subsequent consultations done by the user.

The command choice opens the Network Element Alarm Logger (NE Alarm Logger) window shown in Figure 5. With details, by means of the menus and commands present into the NE Alarm Logger window, it is possible: •

to create a NE Log

•

to delete a NE Log

•

to filter the list of the signals displayed into the NE Alarm Logger window The operation consists of fixing one or more selection criteria in such a way to display only the records that comply with all the specified criteria. Warning. The setting of the filters remains activated until when the operator closes the NE Alarm Logger window.

•

to delete the signals stored into the controller of the equipment

•

to filter the signals stored by the equipment The operation consists of defining some criteria that define the type of the signals that have to be recorded by the equipment and communicated to the SCT/LMT program. Warning. The setting of the filters remains activated until when it is changed by a SCT/LMT user.

•

to save on a file a NE Log The contents of the so created file can be displayed with every text editor.

Warning. The menus and the commands present into the Network Element Alarm Logger window are enabled exclusively and only on the signals stored into the controller of the selected equipment. The signals, displayed into the Alarm history log area, are not affected by such commands.

50

With the wording Network Element log (NE Log), the system identifies a file where it records the alarm and status signals stored into the controller of the selected equipment. Warning. The list of the NE Log and their contents can be displayed only through the N.E. Alarm Logger window. To be able to display the contents of a NE Log using every text editor, it is necessary to export it.


37

Figure 5 Notes of Figure 5 (1)

To each signal, it is devoted a record that points out the following information: •

• •

(2)

38

Severity. This field (represented by a colour box and by a wording) points out if the record refers to a status or alarm signal or if the signal has been detected or it has been reset. If the situation concerns an alarm, it is pointed out also its seriousness level. With details: Colour

Wording

Description

Green

Cleared

Alarm signal reset

Green

Status

Status alarm

Light blue

Warning


Yellow

Minor


Orange

Major


Red

Critical


Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal. Message. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal. The presence of the SET wording points out that the record refers to a detected alarm, the CLEARED wording to a reset alarm.

In this bar, it is po inted out the activation of filters.


To create a NE Log 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the N.E. Logger menu. The system displays the NE Alarm Logger window (refer to Figure 5). 2. Select the line relevant to the equipment for which it has to be created the NE Log. Warning. The selected equipment has to be in connected/login status (green arrow) or connected/monitor (yellow arrow). 3. Select the Upload option present into the menu bar. The system displays a dialogue window with a text box. 4. Into the text box, type the name to be assigned to the NE Log (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 maximum 30 characters). Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two NE Logs relevant to the same equipment. 5. Press OK. The system displays the Event Log Filter window. The available criteria are the following ones: •

Severity Enable. In this area, it is possible to set, as a criterion, the signal type (alarm or status) and for the alarm their seriousness. With details: Box

Description

Status (green)

Status signal

Warning (light blue)

Alarm signal with Warning seriousness

Minor (yellow)

Alarm signal with Minor seriousness

Major (orange)

Alarm signal with Major seriousness

Critical (red)

Alarm signal with Critical seriousness

To activate the filter, remove the selection mark from the box ( ), to deactivate it, select the box (). •

Occurred date. In this area, it is possible to define as a filter the signal date. activating the following box, with details: −

Before, into the signal list of the Network Element Alarm Logger window, the system will display only the records with recording date that proceeds the set one.

−

After, the system displays only the records with recording date that is more recent than the set one.

In both the boxes, to set the date, select the arrow and choose the desired date from the displayed calendar. Warning. If it has b een displayed the Equipment logger empty message, the system does not create the log file because it is not memorized any signal into the equipment controller. 6. Activate only the desired filtering criteria in such a way to record, into the NE Log, only the signals that comply with all the activated criteria. 7. Press the Apply push-button. If the selected equipment is in connected/login status, the system displays the Delete all items stored in the equipment? message. Select the push-button: −

Yes, to create the NE Log and to delete the signals stored into the equipment controller.

−

No, to create the NE Log and to prevent the deleting of the signals.

Into the equipment list of the NE Alarm Logger window, it is displayed a line with the name of the created NE Log. If the selected equipment is in connected/monitor status, into the equipment list of the NE Alarm Logger window, it is displayed a line with the name of the created NE Log Warning. For the same equipment, it is possible to create all the desired NE Logs.

Warning. If the selected equipment is in connected/login status, when the user selects the Apply push-button, the system can displays the following message: Read-only users not allowed to upload on this equipment firmware version. You must login in read-write user


39

profile; such a message points out that the firmware version present into the equipment does not support the creation of the NE Log when the equipment is in co nnected/monitor status. In such a case, to be able to create the NE Log, it will be necessary to activate the login with the equipment.

To delete a NE Log 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the N.E. Logger menu. The system displays the NE Alarm Logger window (refer to Figure 5). 2. Select the line relevant to the NE Log to be deleted. Warning. Selecting the line relevant to the equipment, it is possible to delete, at the same time, all the NE Logs of the equipment. Then, if such an equipment is in disconnected status, it is deleted at its turn. 3. Select the Delete option present into the menu bar. The system displays a confirmation window. 4. Press Yes.

To define the filters for the signal displaying into the NE Alarm Logger window 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the N.E. Logger menu. The system displays the NE Alarm Logger window (refer to Figure 5). 2. Select the Set List Filter option. The system displays the Event Log Filter dialogue window. The available criteria are the following ones: •


Description

Status (green)

Status signal



Minor (yellow)


Major (orange)


Critical (red)




−

Before, into the signal list of the Network Element Alarm Logger window, the system will display only the records with recording date that proceeds the set one. After, the system displays only the records with recording date that is more recent than the set one.

In both the boxes, to set the date, select the arrow and choose the desired date from the displayed calendar. 3. Press Apply. At the selection of a NE Log, the system will display only the signals that comply with all the set criteria.

40


To delete the signals stored into the equipment 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the N.E. Logger menu. The system displays the NE Alarm Logger window (refer to Figure 5). 2. Select the line relevant to the equipment for which the operator wants to delete the signals. It is possible to select also a NE Log of the equipment. Warning. The selected equipment has to be in connected/login status (green arrow). 3. Select the N.E. Maint - Delete Events option present into the menu bar. The system displays a confirmation window. 4. Press Yes. The system displays the Event Log Filter window. The available criteria are the following ones: •


Description

Status (green)

Status signal



Minor (yellow)


Major (orange)


Critical (red)




−

Before, into the signal list of the Network Element Alarm Logger window, the system will display only the records with recording date that proceeds the set one. After, the system displays only the records with recording date that is more recent than the set one.

In both the boxes, to set the date, select the arrow and choose the desired date from the displayed calendar. 5. Set the criteria present into the window in such a way to delete only the signals that comply with all the defined criteria. 6. Choose the Apply push-button.

To define the criteria that have to be used to memorize the signals into the equipment controller 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the N.E. Logger menu. The system displays the NE Alarm Logger window (refer to Figure 5). 2. Select the line relevant to the equipment for which the operator wants to define the criteria. Warning. The selected equipment has to be in connected/login status (green arrow refer to Figure 5). 3. Select the N.E. Maint - Setup Record Filter option. The system displays the Event Record Setup window. The available criteria are the following ones: •

Severity Enable. In this area, it is possible to set, as a criterion, the signal type (alarm or status) and for the alarm their seriousness. With details:


41

Box

Description

Status (green)

Status signal



Minor (yellow)


Major (orange)


Critical (red)



Recording period during a day. In this area, it is possible to define the time range during the day when the signals have to be recorded. Into the bo x: −

Start Hour, set the starting time of such a period.

−

Stop Hour, set the ending time of such a period

51

.

4. Press Apply and then confirm. The equipment will store into its controller only the signals that comply with all the set criteria.

To save on a file a NE Log 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the N.E. Logger menu. The system displays the NE Alarm Logger window (refer to Figure 5). 2. Select the line relevant to the NE Log to be saved. 3. Select the Export option present into the menu bar. The system displays the Export current Log window. 4. Into the proper box, type the name of the file (with extension .log) and set the path where the file has to b e saved; by default, the system advises the folder where it has been installed the SCT/LMT program. 5. Choose the Save push-button.

4.6.2

“Alarm history log” area - “Cmd Logger” menu

The Cmd Logger menu, present into the Alarm history log area, allows reading the list of the operations executed by the SCT/LMT and NMS5UX (command log) users, stored on the controller of the equipment. The log read from equipment (called Command Log - Cmd log) 52 is stored on the hard disk of the PC and it remains available for subsequent consultations done by the user. Warning. The subject functionality is available only for the equipment of PDH-AL type. The command choice opens the Network Element Command Logger (NE Command Logger) window shown in Figure 6.

51

For instance, if into the Start Hour box, it is pointed out the number 8 and into the Stop Hour box the number 17, it means that the equipment will record only the signals that has occurred between the 8 a.m. and the 5.59 p.m. 52

With the wording Command log (Cmd Log), the system identifies a file where it records the operations executed by the SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user stored into the controller of the selected equipment. Warning. The list of the Cmd Log and their contents can be displayed only through the Network Element Command Logger window. To be able to display the contents of a Cmd Log using every text editor, it is necessary to export it.

42


With details, by means of the menus and commands present into the NE Command Logger window, it is possible: •

to read by equipment a Cmd Log

•

to delete a Cmd Log

•

to filter the list of the operations displayed into the NE Command Logger window The operation consists of fixing one or more selection criteria in such a way to display only the records that comply with all the specified criteria. Warning. The setting of the filters remains activated until when the operator closes the NE Command Logger window.

•

to delete the operations stored into the controller of the equipment

•

to filter the operations stored by the equipment The operation consists of defining some criteria that define the type of the operations that have to be recorded by the equipment and communicated to the SCT/LMT program. Warning. The setting of the filters remains activated until when it is changed by a SCT/LMT user.

•

to save on a file a Cmd Log The contents of the so created file can be displayed with every text editor.

Figure 6


43


To each operation, it is devoted a record that points out the following information: •

Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation

•

Source address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been executed the operation

•

User . Name of the user who has executed the operation.

•

Object . Object to which the operation refers.

•

Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.

•

Value Set . Set value.

Warning. The presence of the symbol "….." points out that the information is not available because it is a not significant one for the type of operation to which it refers. (2)

In this bar, it is po inted out the activation of filters.

To read from equipment a Cmd Log 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the Cmd Logger menu. The system displays the NE Command Logger window (refer to Figure 6). 2. Select the line relevant to the equipment from which it has to be read the Cmd Log. Warning. The selected equipment has to be in connected/login status (green arrow) or connected/monitor (yellow arrow). 3. Select the Upload option present into the menu bar. The system displays a dialogue window with a text box. 4. Into the text box, type the name to be assigned to the Cmd Log (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 maximum 30 characters). Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two Cmd Logs relevant to the same equipment. 5. Press OK. The system displays the Command Log Filter window. The available criteria are the following ones: •

Source Address. In the subject box, the user can set as criterion, the IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been executed the operation. To activate the criterion, type the IP address of the machine.

•

User. In the subject box, the user can set as criterion, the name of the user who has executed the operation. To activate the criterion, select the arrow, placed on the side of the box, and select from the “user list” of the equipment, the desired option or type the user name.

•

Object Identifier. In the subject box, the user can set as criterion, the name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which the operation refers. To activate the criterion, select the arrow, placed on the side of the box, and select from the list, the desired object.

•

Occurred date. Into the subject area, the user can define as filter, the execution date of the operations. With details, activating: −

The Before box, the system will display, into the operation list of NE Command Logger window, only the operations with an execution date that precedes the set one.

−

The After box, the system will display only the operations with an execution date that follows the set one.

Into both boxes, to set the date, activate the control box, select the arrow and choose the desired date from the displayed calendar.

44


Warning. If it has b een displayed the Equipment logger empty message, the system does not create the log file because it is not memorized any operation into the equipment controller. 6. Activate only the desired filtering criteria in such a way to record, into the Cmd Log, only the operations that comply with all the activated criteria. 7. Press the Apply push-button. If the selected equipment is in connected/login status, the system displays the Delete all items stored in the equipment? message. Select the push-button: −

Yes, to cr eate the Cmd Log and to delete the operations stored into the equipment controller.

−

No, to create the Cmd Log and to prevent the deleting of the operations.

Into the equipment list of the NE Command Logger window, it is displayed a line with the name of the created Cmd Log. If the selected equipment is in connected/monitor status, into the equipment list of the NE Command Logger window, it is displayed a line with the name of the created Cmd Log. Warning. For the same equipment, it is possible to create all the desired Cmd Logs.

To delete a Cmd Log 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the Cmd Logger menu. The system displays the NE Command Logger window (refer to Figure 6). 2. Select the line relevant to the Cmd Log to be deleted. Warning. Selecting the line relevant to the equipment, it is possible to delete, at the same time, all the Cmd Logs of the equipment. Then, if such an equipment is in disconnected status, it is deleted at its turn. 3. Select the Delete option present into the menu bar. The system displays a confirmation window. 4. Press Yes.

To define the filters for the operations displaying into the NE Command Logger window 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the Cmd Logger menu. The system displays the NE Command Logger window (refer to Figure 6). 2. Select the Set List Filter option. The system displays the Command Log Filter dialogue window. The available criteria are the following ones: •


•


•

Object Identifier. In the subject box, the user can set as criterion, the name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which the operation refers.


45

To activate the criterion, select the arrow, placed on the side of the box, and select from the list, the desired object. •


The Before box, the system will display, into the operation list of NE Command Logger window, only the operations with an execution date that precedes the set one.

−

The After box, the system will display only the operations with an execution date that follows the set one.

Into both boxes, to set the date, activate the control box, select the arrow and choose the desired date from the displayed calendar. 3. Press Apply. At the selection of a Cmd Log, the system will display only the operations that comply with all the set criteria.

To delete the operations stored into the equipment 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the Cmd Logger menu. The system displays the NE Command Logger window (refer to Figure 6). 2. Select the line relevant to the equipment for which the operator wants to delete the operations. It is possible to select also a Cmd Log of the equipment. Warning. The selected equipment has to be in connected/login status (green arrow). 3. Select the N.E. Maint - Delete Events option present into the menu bar. The system displays a confirmation window. 4. Press Yes. The system displays the Command Log Filter window. The available criteria are the following ones: •


•


•

Object Identifier. In the subject box, the user can set as criterion, the name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which the operation refers. To activate the criterion, select the arrow, placed on the side of the box, and select from the list, the desired object.

•


−

The Before box, the system will display, into the operation list of NE Command Logger window, only the operations with an execution date that precedes the set one. The After box, the system will display only the operations with an execution date that follows the set one.

Into both boxes, to set the date, activate the control box, select the arrow and choose the desired date from the displayed calendar. 5. Set the criteria present into the window in such a way to delete only the operations that comply with all the defined criteria. 6. Choose the Apply push-button.

46


To define the criteria that have to be used to memorize the operations into the equipment controller 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the Cmd Logger menu. The system displays the NE Command Logger window (refer to Figure 6). 2. Select the line relevant to the equipment for which the operator wants to define the criteria. Warning. The selected equipment has to be in connected/login status (green arrow refer to Figure 6). 3. Select the N.E. Maint - Setup Record Filter option. The system displays the Event Record Setup window. The available criteria are the following ones: •

Recording period during a day. In this area, it is possible to define the time range during the day when the operations have to be recorded. Into the box: −

Start Hour, set the starting time of such a period.

−

Stop Hour, set the ending time of such a period

53

.

4. Press Apply and then confirm. The equipment will store into its controller only the operations that comply with all the set criteria.

To save on a file a Cmd Log 1. Into the SCT/LMT window select the Cmd Logger menu. The system displays the NE Command Logger window (refer to Figure 6). 2. Select the line relevant to the Cmd Log to be saved. 3. Select the Export option present into the menu bar. The system displays the Export current Log window. 4. Into the proper box, type the name of the file (with extension .log) and set the path where the file has to be saved; by default, the system advises the folder where it has been installed the SCT/LMT program. 5. Choose the Save push-button.

53

For instance, if into the Start Hour box, it is pointed out the number 8 and into the Stop Hour box the number 17, it means that the equipment will record only the operations that has occurred between the 8 a.m. and the 5.59 p.m.


47

5.

MENUS

Into the SCT/LMT window, there are, as push-buttons, the following menus: •

Connect, contains the commands to activate the connection with every equipment present into the network. If the operation has been successfully executed, the Connect menu is replaced with the Disconnect one. The choice of this last option allows deactivating the connection.

•

Login, contains the commands to activate the login with one or more remote equipment present into the Equipment list area.

•

Logout, contains the commands to deactivate the login with one or more remote equipment present into the Equipment list area.

•

Refresh, contains the commands to request the updating of the information present into the Equipment list area.

•

Equipment, contains the commands to check the configuration, composition, functional status etc. of the equipment selected into the Equipment list area.

•

Network, contains the commands for the management of the users that can use the program.

•

Options, contains the commands to customize the program (number of signals that can be stored into the alarm history, connection modes and parameters, etc.).

•

Tools, contains the command to save, open, display, transfer a configuration file, the command for the management of the “remote equipment” list and the command to display the monitoring files (alarms and PM measurements) recorded with the Siae Alarm & Performance Monitoring program 54.

For each menu, in the relative description, it is pointed out the “login” status of the equipment and the user profile necessary to be able to use it. Warning. Some push-buttons are characterized by the arrow symbol ( ), the selection of such a symbol opens a pop-up menu that lists the options coupled to such a menu.

5.1

Connect/Disconnect menu

The Connect menu, contains the commands to activate the connection with every equipment present into the network. If the operation has been successfully executed, the Connect menu is replaced with the Disconnect one. The choice of this last option allows deactivating the connection.

Warning. At the starting-up of the program, it is possible to activate automatically the connection with a specific equipment. More detailed information are reported into the Automatic activation of the connection paragraph.

54

The Alarm & Performance Monitoring program allows monitoring all the connected equipment and memorizing on a file the results of the PM measurements and the alarms/events. More detailed information concerning the program are reported into the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on-line guide/manual.

48


Menu Connect Equipment status User profile

Disconnected Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The Connect menu allows activating the connection with every equipment present into the network. Such an equipment will be considered by the program as the “local equipment”.

At the end of the operation, if the operation itself has been successfully executed, the local equipment will result in “connected/login” status. In this condition, the user can check the functional status of the equipment, the details of the current alarms and, if his user profile 55 allows it, he can execute the firmware updating and operate directly on the equipment management opening the LCT interface, execute the updating of the software/firmware (sw/fw), activate/deactivate the measurements of the performances, etc.

When the local equipment is connected, the program forwards the connection command to all the “remote equipment” present into the Remote Element List 56. After the connection, the remote equipment will result in “connected/monitor” status. In this condition, the user can check the functioning status of the equipment, the details of the current alarms and store the alarm/status signals on the PC disk, open the LCT interface, but he can not update the equipment sw/fw, activate/deactivate the measurements of performances, execute the changes and/or forward commands into the LCT interface. To execute this operation, it is necessary to forward the login command.

Warning. The LMT graphical interface manages 2 equipment only. This means that if the program is using the LMT interface, it will activate the connection with 2 equipment only, also if the “remote equipment” list of the local equipment contains more than 2 equipment.

To activate the connection 1. Into the SCT/LMT window, select: •

the Connect menu. The program asks for the connection with the last local equipment to which it has been connected before.

•

the Connect menu arrow and choose, from the list, the equipment to be used to activate the connection. Warning. Into the list (called “connection list”), there are only the equipment where the connection has been activated at least one time 57.

It is displayed the Login To Equipment window. Warning. If it is used the serial connection (the direct connection or the remotized one) before displaying the Login To Equipment window, the program executes a check of the serial line presence 58.

55

Every user is coupled with a user profile. Such a profile defines the commands and the functions available for the user itself. 56

The “remote element list” is a list that contains all the information concerning the network equipment that have to be connected with the program. Warning. The “remote element” list has to be set by the user and it can be always increased or changed. The user can save the list into the equipment controller or into a file. 57

The maximum number of equipment into the “connection list” can be changed, then, it is possible to delete all the options present into the list.


49

2. Into the Equipment IP Address box, the system displays the IP address or the network identification code of the last equipment that has been connected with the program or of the equipment selected into the “connection list” according to the executed selection 59. If the operator wants to activate the connection with a “new” equipment type into the Equipment IP Address box, the IP address of the “new” equipment. Warning. The IP address means the address of the equipment supervisory port from which the SCT/LMT program reaches the equipment. Warning. If it is used the serial connection, the program automatically displays the IP address of the equipment serial port. 3. Type into the User box, the name of the SCT/LMT user to be used to activate the connection 60 . 4. Type into the Password box, the access code coupled with the set user. 5. Type into the Network Password box, the network access code

61

.

This code is necessary to be able to activate the connection with the remote equipment. Warning. If the user does not set the network password, the program will activate only the connection with the local equipment and with the possible remote equipment, of Remote Link type, present into the “remote equipment list” (Remote Element List) 62. 6. Activate the Remember Password box, if the user wants that, at the next opening of the window, the system automatically displays the current passwords, on the co ntrary, deactivate the box under examination. 7. Activate the Disable Trap Notification box, if the user wants that during all the connection time with the equipment, the equipment themselves do not forward traps 63 to the program. Warning. To activate again the forwarding of the traps, it will be necessary to disconnect the equipment and to connect them again taking care to deactivate the Disable Trap Notification box. 8. Select, into the Retrieve Remote Element List area, the Remote Element List to be used for the connection with the remote equipment. With details, select the push-button: •

•

from this equipment, to activate the connection with the remote equipment present into the Remote Element List of the local equipment. from file, to activate the connection with the remote equipment present into the Remote Element List saved on a file.

58

If the check is successfully executed, the connection procedure can continue. If the check result is negative, check the serial cable or the connection one with the modem, check the setting of the Remote Access System, check the modem configuration, check the connection type setted in the Connection card and execute again the connection procedure. 59

Warning. In this second case, it will not be possible to change the value inserted into the Equipment IP Address box. 60

Warning. If the equipment to be connected with is managed also by the Siae NMS5UX supervisory system, the NMS5UX system considers the connection of a SCT/LMT user with Read only profile a LCT connection in Monitoring mode. While the NMS5UX system considers the connection to the equipment of a SCT/LMT user with Station Operator or System profile a LCT connection in Configuration mode. 61

Warning. By default the Network password is equal to siaemicr . Such a password can be changed by the user with System profile. 62

Warning. If into the “remote equipment list” of the local equipment, there are more elements of Remote Link type, at the connection (it the user does not insert the network password), the system will activate the connection with the local equipment and with the FIRST equipment of Remote Link type present into the list. 63

Disable the forwarding of the traps means that at the detection of the alarms, the alarms themselves are recorded into the equipment controller but the system does not communicate them to the management program. On the contrary to enable the forwarding of the traps (default condition), means that at the detection of the alarms, the alarms themselves are recorded into the equipment controller and communicated to the management program that will display them into the current alarms and into the alarm history.

50


If it has been selected the from file push-button, the system displays the Login to Equipment window showing the File Name box. Set, into the text box, the path and the name of the file into which it has been saved the desired Remote Element List . 9. Choose the OK push-button. If all the set parameters are the correct ones and the operation has been successfully ended, the system displays, into the Station list area, one record for each station present into the “remote element list” and into the Equipment list area, the system displays one record for each equipment coupled with the currently selected station. Warning. After the connection, the local equipment is in connected/login status. The remote equipment are in disconnected status or in connected/monitor. For the remote equipment, the login request has to be forwarded by the user through the Login menu. If the system displays the following message: •

“The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as read only user” , it means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX siae supervisory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/LMT user, to be able to execute the login 64 of the equipment under examination. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the SCT/LMT user for the execution of the operation.

•

“No response from ”, it means that the equipment has not answered to the connection request of the program.

•

“Authentication fail”, check that the set user’s name ( User box ) is the correct one and/or is present into the “user list” of the equipment and check that the set user’s password (Password box ) is the correct one.

•

“A new login is available only for SYSTEM user”, it means that the equipment has already been connected with (in connected/login status), 5 users and that the user that is asking for the connection is a user with Read only, Read and Write or Station Operator level. At each single equipment, it is possible to connect at the same time 6 users. The sixth user can require for the connection only, if he has the System profile 65. It is possible to check the number and the profile of the users connected to the equipment, opening the Logged User Viewer window.

•

“Too Many Users”, it means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum number of allowed users. At each single equipment, it is possible to connect at the same time 6 users. It is possible to check the number and the profile of the users connected to the equipment, opening the Logged User Viewer window.

•

WARNING. The local equipment is not present in Remote Element List. Probable cause:…., means that into the “remote equipment list”, it is not present the local equipment and it points out the possible causes: 1. The IP Address of the local equipment defined into the list is different from the Agent IP Address of the local equipment. 2. The local equipment is not present into the list. In such a case, the program does not know to which station the local equipment is coupled with (such an information is not present into the remote equipment list), then it will display the local equipment into the Undefined station.

If the connection with the remote equipment has not been activated, check that the inserted network password (Network Password box ) is the correct one.

64

The login operation is executed at the same time of the connection operation for the local equipment. 65

For instance, if 5 users are connected, in connected/login status, to an equipment and an additional user, with Read only profile (or Read and Write or Station Operator one ), requires for the connection, the equipment does not allows the execution of such an operation. On the contrary, if the connection has been requested by a user with System profile (SYSTEM or NMS5UX user ), the equipment accepts the request.


51

Disconnect menu Equipment status User profile

Connected/Login Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The Disconnect menu allows deactivating the connection with the local equipment. Warning. This operation causes the automatic disconnection of all the remote equipment.

To deactivate the co nnection 1. Into the SCT/LMT window, select the Disconnect menu. If the operation has been successfully executed, the program removes the records present into the Station list and Equipment list area. Warning. If the “One o more measure recorder(s) are running: disconnect anyway?”, message is displayed, it means that at least a recording of the Prx or BER values is running. The disconnection of the equipment causes the stop of the recording.

5.1.1

Automatic activation of the connection

If the user wants that, at the starting-up of the SCT/LMT program, the system automatically activates the connection with a specific equipment, it is necessary to change the command line of the program 66, in the following way: Command line …. sct.exe

Parameter to be added /AUTOLOG IP:
67

> USR:
68

> PW:
69

> NPW:
70

>

For instance …sct.exe /AUTOLOG IP:10.10.25.99 USR:SYSTEM PW:SIAEMICR NPW:SIAEMICR Warning. The PW and NPW parameters are optional ones. If the user DOES NOT add to the command line the parameter: •

PW: and NPW:, at the starting-up of the program, the system displays the Login To Equipment window 71 with the Equipment IP Address and User fields set with the values present into the command line. To activate the connection with the equipment (local and remote ones), type, into the Password box , the access code of the user and into the Network Password box , the network access code.

•

NPW:, at the starting-up of the program, the system activates the connection with the local equipment and with the possible remote equipment, of Remote Link type, present into the “remote equipment list” 72.

66

For instance, the user can change the command line of the program selecting the SCT icon, pressing the R.H. side push-button of the mouse, and the Properties command. The system displays the command line into the Shortcut card , Target field (English version of Windows). 67

IP address of the equipment to be connected.

68

Name of the SCT/LMT user with the connection to be activated.

69

Access code coupled with the set user.

70

Network access code.

71

The description of the Login To Equipment window is reported into the Menu Connect/Disconnect paragraph.

52


5.2

Login menu 73

Equipment status User profile

Connected/Monitor Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The Login menu allows requesting “the access” to the remote equipment in such a way to be able to operate directly on its management. With details, the menu under examination changes the status, of the remote equipment involved in the operation, from connected/monitor to connected/login. In this status, the user (if his user profile allows it) can open the LCT graphical interface and, he can change the parameters and/or send the commands, update the equipment sw/fw, can activate/deactivate the measurements of performances, can change the connection parameters of the equipment. Warning. If it has been selected the local equipment, the command has not any effect because such an equipment gets the connected/login status after the connection.

To execute the login of one or more remote equipment 1. Into the Station List area, select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area, the record or the records relevant to the remote equipment in connected/monitor status for which the operator wants to execute the login. Warning. If the operator wants to execute the login of all the remote equipment present into the Equipment list area, it is necessary to select the records. 3. Execute one of the following operations: •

Select the Login menu to execute the login of the remote equipment selected into the Equipment list.

•

Select the arrow on the side of the Login menu. It is displayed a pop-up menu that contains the following commands: −

Selected. It executes the login of the remote equipment selected into the Equipment list area.

−

All. It executes the login of all the remote equipment present into the Equipment list area.

Choose the desired command. It is displayed the Remote Login window. 4. Type, into the User box, the name of the SCT/LMT user involved in the connection activation 74 . 5. Type, into the Password box, the access code coupled with the set user. 6. Choose OK.

72

Warning. If, into the “remote equipment list” of the local equipment, there are more elements of Remote Link type, at the connection (if the user does not insert the network password), the system will activate the connection with the local equipment and with the FIRST equipment of Remote Link type present into the list. 73

Warning. The push-button is available also if it has been selected a remote equipment in connected/login status. However in this case, it is necessary to execute before the logout operation and then to execute the equipment login one. 74

It is possible to use a SCT/LMT user different from the SCT/LMT user who has requested the connection of the local equipment.


53

If the operation has been successfully executed, into the Login column Login column of the records involved in the operation, the wording Monitor is is replaced by the profile of the use u serr who has executed the operation (Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator or or System) 75. If the user types, into the “user list” of the equipment, the name of a wrong and/or not present user (User (User box ) or ) or the wrong user password (Password (Password box ), ), the equipment does not switch in Authenticati in Authentication on Fail status. status. Use the Refresh command Refresh command to gr aphically restore the equipment in connected/monitor. If the equipment is already connected with the maximum number of users Too Many User status. status.

76

, it switches to

Use the Refresh option Refresh option to check if it is present an “available” connection. If it is present an available connection, the equipment switches in connected/monitor status, on the contrary, it remains in Too Many User status. If the system displays the following message “The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as read only user” , it means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX siae supervisory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/LMT user, to be able to execute the login of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the SCT/LMT user for the execution of the operation.

5.3

Logout menu



The Logout menu menu allows closing the closing the “access” to the remote equipment. equipment. With details, the menu under examination changes the status, of the remote equipment involved in the operation, from connected/login to connected/monitor. connected/monitor. Warning. The command has not any effect for the local equipment.

75

Every user is coupled with a user profile. Such a profile defines the commands and the functions available for the user itself.

76

Warning. At each single equipment, it is possible to connect at the same time 6 users. The sixth user can require for the login only, if he has the System profile.

For instance, if 5 users are connected, in connected/login status, to an equipment and an additional user, with Read only profile (or (or Read and Write or Station Operator one ), requires for the connection, the equipment does not allows the execution of such an operation. On the contrary, if the connection has been requested by a user with System profile (SYSTEM ( SYSTEM or NMS5UX user ), ), the equipment accepts the request. It is possible to check the number and the profile of the users connected to the equipment, opening the Logged User Viewer window. window.

54


To execute the logout of one or more remote equipment 1. Into the Station List area, select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area, the record or the records relevant to the remote equipment in connected/login status for which the operator wants to execute the logout. Warning. If the operator wants to execute the logout of all the remote equipment present into the Equipment list area, area, it is not necessary to select the records. 3. Execute one of the following following operations: •

Select the Logout menu. It is executed the logout for the remote equipment selected into the Equipment list area. area.

•

Select the arrow on the side of the Logout menu. It is displayed a pop-up menu that contains the following commands: −

−

Selected. Selected. It executes the logout of the remote equipment selected into the Equipment list area. area. All. All. It executes the logout of all the remote equipment present into the Equipment list area. area.

Choose the desired command. If the operation has been successfully executed, into the Login column Login column of the records involved in the operation, it is pointed out the wording Monitor .

5.4

Refresh menu


Connected/Monitor, Connected/Monitor, Connected/Login Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The Refresh menu Refresh menu allows executing an updating of the information present into the Equipment list area. Warning. The command has effect only for the equipment in connected/monitor status or in connected/login one.

The menu choice executes the updating of the information relevant the equipment selected into the Equipment list area. area. The choice of the arrow on the side of the menu opens a pop-up menu that contains the following commands: •

Selected. Selected. It executes the updating of the information relevant only to the equipment selected into the Equipment list area. area.

•

All. All. It executes the updating of the information relevant to all the equipment equipment present into the Equipment list area. area.

During the operation, into the record relevant to the selected equipment, it is pointed out the wording Refreshing.


55

5.5

Equipment menu

At the choice of Equipment menu, the program displays the fo llowing commands: •

LCT Interface/Open LOM , , they allow opening the equipment graphical interface (Local Craft Terminal or Local or Local Operator Manager). Manager). Warning. The system displays the commands one as an alternative to the other: the system displays the Open LOM command command if it has been selected an ELFO radio equipment or a PMP system; the LCT Interface command Interface command if it has been selected every other siae equipment that is equipped with a LCT gr aphical interface.

•

Properties, Properties , it allows checking the features (network identification code, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and executing the software reset of the equipment.

•

View Current Alarms, Alarms , it allows checking the current alarms.

•

Alarm Severity Config, Config, it allows changing the forwarding status of the alarms/trap and the seriousness level coupled with the alarms.

•

View Active Manual Operation, Operation, it allows checking the actually activated manual operations and setting the time (timeout) after which the forcing operations are automatically deactivated.

•

History Events Realignment, Realignment, it allows realigning the information relevant to the alarms, memorized into the disk of the PC and displayed into the Alarm History Log area, Log area, with the ones really present into the selected equipment.

•

Version, Version, it allows checking the version and executing the updating of the equipment software/firmware.

•

Performances, Performances , it allows checking the list of the Performance Monitoring measurements available for the selected equipment type, the status (activated or deactivated) of each single measurement and the relevant results.

•

Units, Units, it allows checking the characteristics of the hardware that composes the equipment.

•

Diagnosis, Diagnosis, it allows running the diagnostics program which, analyzing the active alarms of the selected equipment, returns the possible causes that have triggered the alarms themselves.

•

Communication Setup, Setup, it allows checking and changing the connection parameters (IP address, baud rate, routing table, OSPF parameters, etc.) used by the equipment.

•

•

•

IP/OSI Table Alignment, Alignment , it allows copying the elements present into the “remote element list” list” of the local equipment, into the “Remote “Remote Element List” of the selected equipment. Disable/Enable, Disable/Enable, it allows disabling and then re-enabling again the connection of a equipment with the program. Equipment Features Management, Management, allows checking the functionalities (capacity and additional service channels, management of OSPF protocol, etc.) enabled for the selected equipment. Warning. This command is available only for equipment of PDH-AL type.

•

Equipment Inventory Report, Report, allows saving to file the configuration and the network parameters of the selected equipment. Warning. This command is available only for equipment of SDH and PDH-AL type.

Warning. The Equipment menu is available only when it has been activated the connection with the local equipment. The commands are available only after having selected a record into the Equipment list area. area. The choice of a command affects only the equipment relevant to the record. If a command is not available, it means that the functionality, coupled with it, is not supported by the type of the selected equipment. For instance, for all the ELFO radio equipment, the great part of the commands is not available because such functions (software updating, PM measurements, connection parameters, etc.) are present into the ELFO LOM graphical interface.

56


Warning. The Equipment menu can be open also as a contextual menu, pressing the R.H. pushbutton of the mouse after having selected a equipment.

For each command, in the relative description, it is pointed out the “login” status of the equipment and the user profile necessary to be able to use it. Then, if the command opens a window where there are some parameters, the system po ints out also the type of operation that can be executed. The option Reading points out that it is p ossible to check the parameters, the option Writing that it is possible to set or to change them. Warning. It is not possible to change the parameters if it has been loosen the connection between the program and the equipment.

5.5.1

Equipment - LCT Interface/Open Interface/Open LOM


Connected/Monitor, Connected/Monitor, Connected/Login Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The LCT Interface or Interface or Open LOM command command opens the equipment graphical interface (LCT interface Local Craft Terminal or or LOM interface – Local Operator Manager). Manager). Such an interface allows the direct intervention intervention on the management of the selected equipment. The LCT or LOM interface can be open also, selecting twice quickly on the record. Warning. If the command is not available, it means that the selected equipment is in disconnected status.

Warning. The LCT Interface and Interface and Open LOM commands commands are displayed one as alternative to the other. With details the command: •

LCT Interface, is present into the menu if it has been selected another siae equipment provided with the LCT graphical interface: US, EL, PDH-AL, ADM-C, CommServer-S equipment.

•

Open LOM , is present into the menu if it has been selected an ELFO equipment or a PMP system.

The windows is displayed at the LCT Interface command Interface command choice and it depends on the type of the selected equipment. Warning. For the description and the use of the window, refer to the specific help on line/manual of the equipment. This section provides the following general information, concerning the use of the LCT interfaces: −

Checking and changing operations concerning the configuration parameters of the equipment

−

When the LCT interface is open

−

Opening of more LCT interfaces

−

If the LCT interface does not open

−

Closing of the LCT interface

The selection of the Open LOM command, LOM command, for: −

the PMP systems, starts-up the local management program called PMP Master. Warning. The subject function is not supported by the release 4.2.2 (or successive ones) of the PMP Master program.

−

The ELFO equipment, starts-up the local management program called LOM LOM ELFO. ELFO.

For more detailed information, consult the siae documentation relevant to the PMP Master program program and to the LOM LOM ELFO program


57

Checking and changing operations concerning the configuration parameters of the equipment If the selected equipment is in: •

connected/login status, by means of the LCT interface, the operator will be able to execute checking operations (reading) and changing ones (writing) concerning the configuration parameters of the equipment.

•

connected/monitor connected/monitor status, by means of the LCT interface, the o perator will be able to execute checking operations (reading) only concerning the parameters.

Warning. The detailed indication concerning the availability of the parameters according to the user profile are reported into the relevant help on line/equipment manual.

When the LCT interface is open When the LCT interface is open, it is possible: •

to “loose” the connection between the program and the equipment

77

.

In this condition, the LCT interface remains open. During the period when the equipment is not connected, it is prevented as the possibility to change the parameters parameters or to forward the commands as the one to check the values of the parameters 78. •

That the equip equipment, ment, after a forced logout command executed by the SCT/LMT user o by NMS5UX one 79, is disconnected (Login (Login Time Out wording wording present into the SCT/LMT window). Also in this case, the LCT interface remains open but, also if the Apply push-button is available, the operator has not the possibility to change or to forward commands to the equipment.

Warning. In both cases, if the LCT interface has been closed, it will not be possible longer to open it again until when the equipment will assume the connected (login or monitor) status.

Opening of more LCT interfaces It is possible to open more LCT interfaces (RadioSDH window, RadioPDH window, etc.) relevant to the same equipment or to some different ones.

If the LCT interface does not open To check that: •

the LCT additional software module, relevant to the selected equipment type, has been installed and enabled for the operation. operation. To check the presence of the module, select the Help – About… command. About… command.

77

The system points out the connection and login status of the equipment as into the SCT/LMT window as into the LCT interface.

78

It is not possible to check the values because the SCT program does not store, into the PC disk, the equipment configuration, but at each displaying request of the parameters (selection of one option executed by the user), the program asks for the relevant values directly to the equipment.

79

More detailed information concerning the Force Logout option option available for the NMS5UX user, are reported into the “NMS5UX” Siae user manual.

58


If the software module is not present, execute its installation. •

the equipment selected into connected/monitor 81 status.

the

SCT/LMT

window

is

in

connected/login

80

or

Closing of the LCT interface The closing of the LCT interface does not affect in any way the connection or login status of the equipment. Warning. The LCT interface is automatically closed when the user: •

changes a configuration parameter and after executes a software reset of the equipment;

•

deactivates the connection between the SCT/LMT progr am and the equipment;

•

closes the SCT/LMT main window.

5.5.2

Equipment - Properties


Reading: Reading/Writing: Reading: Reading/Writing:

Connected/Monitor Connected/Login Read only Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The Properties command allows checking the network characteristics of the equipment: identification code, addresses, etc. The choice of the command opens the window shown in Figure 7. Warning. It is possible to open more Equipment Properties windows relevant to different equipment.

If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the elements present into the Equipment Properties window, it is possible: •

to change the network identification code of the equipment

•

to change the IP address of the agent SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) relevant to the equipment

•

to execute the software reset of the equipment The software reset consists of initialising again all the communication channels (for instance with the SCT/LMT) of the equipment. Warning. After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

•

to set the reference date/time

80

The local equipment gets the connected/login status after having forwarded the connection command. On the contrary, the remote equipment, after having forwarded the login command. 81

The local equipment does never get the connected/monitor status.

The remote equipment get it after having forwarded the connection command.


59

Figure 7 Notes of Figure 7 (1)

The system points out also the MIB version (Management Information Base), when the relevant value is available into the MIB loaded on the equipment under examination.

(2)

The box: •

Agent IP Address, points out the IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) of the equipment.

•

Ethernet IP Address, points out the IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network (Ethernet port) of the equipment.

•

MAC Address (Media Access Control Address), points out the physical address of the equipment 82.

•

IP/OSI Address Relation, points out the IP Address of the inner port for the interfacing with the OSI router, and the GOSIP Address of the equipment. Warning. The parameters are meaningful and they are pointed out only if the Equipment Properties window refers to an equipment inserted into an OSI network 83.

(3)

The format of the date/time changes according to the setting executed in Windows.

82

The physical address is composed by 6 bytes: the first 3 bytes points out the manufacturing company of the equipment (Siae Microelettronica), the remaining 3 ones the production serial number different for each equipment. Warning. The physical address can not be changed. 83

The OSI network is a network where it is used also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol as co mmunication protocol b etween the network elements.

60


To change the network identification code of the equipment 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Properties command. The system displays the Equipment Properties window. 4. Select the Station ID box and type an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 32 characters. 5. Press Apply and then confirm. The new value is pointed out into the record relevant to the selected equipment in the SCT/LMT window. Warning. If the parameter is not set, the system will automatically assign, as identification code, the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment itself.

To change the Agent IP Address of the equipment 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Properties command. The system displays the Equipment Properties window. 4. Into the Agent IP Address box, type, for each one of the four available spaces (subdivided by a point), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 5. Press Apply and then confirm

To execute the software re-starting of the equipment 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Properties command. The system displays the Equipment Properties window. 4. Choose the Restart push-button. The system displays the message “Are you sure you want to restart the equipment?”. 5. Press Yes to execute the operation.

To change the reference date/time of the equipment 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment.


61

3. Select the Equipment – Properties command. The system displays the Equipment Properties window. 4. Choose the Settings push-button. The system displays the Time Settings dialogue window

84

.

5. Press the Align time to current equipment push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. Warning. The operation could cause the logout of the user. 6. Press Yes. The new value is pointed out into the Equipment Date/Time box of the Equipment Properties window.

5.5.3

Equipment - View Current Alarms


Connected/Monitor, Connected/Login Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The View Current Alarms command allows displaying the details of the current alarms present into the selected equipment. Its choice opens the window shown into Figure 8. Warning. It is possible to open more Current Alarms of... windows relevant to different equipment.

Figure 8

84

It is possible to open the Time Settings window also by means of the choice of the Time Settings command.

62



The command has to be used only in the case of connection troubles, because the Current Alarms of window is a dynamic one, this means that the presence of an alarm is immediately pointed out.

(2)


(3)

If the operator has not set any identification code, the program points out the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.

(4)

The alarms are are subdivided in logical group. It’s possible to expand/compress a alarms group selecting the symbol placed on the side of the group name. For each alarm, the system points out: •

•

the seriousness level of the alarm (

). With details:

Colour

Wording

Description

Green

Status

Status signal

Light blue

Warning

Alarm signal with Warning seriousness level

Yellow

Minor

Alarm signal with Minor seriousness level

Orange

Major

Alarm signal with Major seriousness level

Red

Critical

Alarm signal with Critical seriousness level

detection date and time of the alarm. The date/time format changes according to the setting executed in Windows.

•

5.5.4

a message that specifies the alarm kind.

Equipment - Alarm Severity Config




The Alarm Severity Config command allows checking the seriousness level coupled with the alarms and the memorization/forwarding status of the alarms from the selected equipment to the management program. The choice of the command opens the window shown in Figure 9. Warning. It is possible to open more Alarm Severity Configuration windows relevant to different equipment.

If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the elements present into the Alarm Severity Configuration window, it is possible: •

to enable/disable the memorization/forwarding operation of each alarm to the management program (SCT/LMT and, if it is present, to the Siae NMS5UX supervisory system). To disable an alarm means that at the alarm detection, the alarm itself is not recorded into the equipment control and then, it is not communicated to the management program: as if the alarm has never occurred. On the contrary, to enable an alarm (default condition) means that at its detection, the alarm itself is recorded into the equipment controller and if the forwarding of the relevant trap has been enabled (refer to the following point), the alarm is communicated to the management program that displays it into the current alarms and into the alarm history.


63

•

to enable/disable the forwarding of the trap, coupled with each alarm, to the management program (SCT/LMT and, if it is present, to the Siae NMS5UX supervisory system). To disable a trap means that at the alarm detection, the alarm itself is recorded into the equipment control but it is not communicated to the management program. On the contrary, to enable an trap (default condition) means that at the alarm detection, the alarm itself is recorded into the equipment controller and communicated to the management program that displays it into the current alarms and into the alarm history. Warning. A trap can be enabled/disabled only if it has been enabled the alarm memorization.

•

to change the seriousness level coupled with each single alarm

Figure 9

64




(2)


(3)

To display the alarm list select the symbol + or click twice on . To "hide" the alarm list select the symbol - or click twice on . Warning. The groups and the alarms change according to change of the equipment type. Warning. The wording Unavailable in this SW version, placed on the side of the description of an alarm, points out that the involved alarm is not supported by the current software/firmware version present into the equipment controller.

To change the memorization/forwarding status of the alarm 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Alarm Severity Config command. The system displays the Alarm Severity Configuration window. 4. Select the desired alarm signal. 5. Choose the Properties push-button or click twice quickly on the record. The system displays the Alarm Severity Properties window. 6. Into the Severity area, select the following option push-button: •

Disable, if the user wants to disable the alarm memorization/forwarding. Warning. In this case, it will not be possible to change the status of the relevant trap because such a trap is automatically disabled.

•

Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical, if the user wants to enable the alarm memorization. Choose the option push-button relevant to the seriousness level to be assigned to the alarm. Warning. The enabling/disabling of the alarm forwarding to the management program depends on the setting of the relevant trap (refer to the Trap area).

7. Press the Ok push-button. If it has been selected, into the Alarm Severity Configuration window , the following option push-button: •

Disable, the system displays an X on the side of the signal.

•

Status, Warning, ... the box on the side of the signal takes the colour coupled with the pre-defined seriousness level.

8. To communicate the equipment changes, press the Apply push-button and then confirm.


65

To change the forwarding status of the trap Warning. It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm memorization into the equipment controller. 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Alarm Severity Config command. The system displays the Alarm Severity Configuration window. 4. Select the desired alarm signal. 5. Choose the Properties push-button or click twice quickly on the record. The system displays the Alarm Severity Properties window. 6. Into the Trap area, select the following option push-button: •

Disable, if the user wants to disable the alarm forwarding to the management system.

•

Enable, if the user wants to enable the alarm forwarding to the management system.

7. Press the Ok push-button. Into the Alarm Severity Configuration window, the system displays the new status of the trap after the signal. 8. To communicate the equipment changes, press the Apply push-button and then confirm.

To change the seriousness level of an alarm 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Alarm Severity Config command. The system displays the Alarm Severity Configuration window. 4. Select the desired alarm signal. 5. Choose the Properties push-button or click twice quickly on the record. The system displays the Alarm Severity Properties window. 6. Into the Severity area, select the option push-button relevant to the seriousness level to the assigned to the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical . Warning. If the memorization/forwarding of the alarm has been disabled (the Disable pushbutton has been selected), the choice of a different option push-button changes the seriousness level of the alarm and at the same time automatically enables its memorization into the equipment controller. While, the alarm forwarding to the management program depends on the status of the relevant trap (refer to the setting of the Trap area). 7. Press the Ok push-button. Into the Alarm Severity Configuration window , the box on the side of the signal takes the colour coupled with the pre-defined seriousness level. 8. To communicate the equipment changes, press the Apply push-button and then confirm.

66


5.5.5

Equipment - View Active Manual Operation




The View Active Manual Operation command allows checking the manual operations (for instance loop activation, switching forcing) actually activated into the selected equipment. The choice of the command opens the window shown in Figure 10. Warning. It is possible to open more Active Manual Operation windows relevant to different equipment.

If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, it is possible to set a time (timeout) after which the manual forcing is automatically removed. Warning. The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the selected equipment.

To change the timeout of the manual operations 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - View Active Manual Operation command. The system displays the Active Manual Operation window. 4. Select the Set Timeout push-button. The system displays a dialogue window. 5. Type, into the text box, a timeout comprised between 1 and 172800 seconds (48 hours). Warning. The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the Timeout (it means that the activation operations of the manual forcing will not be automatically disabled but the user will have to execute such op erations). 6. Press the OK push-button. The system displays the new Timeout value into the lower bar of the Active Manual Operation window.


67

Figure 10

Note of Figure 10 (1)

The information present into the window are not dynamically updated.

(2)


(3)

The wording Manual Operation Timeout disabled points out that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. Warning. The activation of a manual forcing (for instance a loop) affects the traffic.

5.5.6

Equipment – History Events Realignment


Reading: Reading:


The History Events Realignment command allows realigning the information relevant to the alarms, memorized into the disk of the PC and displayed into the Alarm History Log area, with the ones really present into the selected equipment. Warning. The subject command has to be used only if it is present a disaligned situation between the alarm information known by the SCT/LMT program and the real alarm situation present into the equipment.

68


To align again the alarms of an equipment 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – History Events Realignment command. The system displays a window that points out the progress situation of the operation.

5.5.7

Equipment - Version




The Version command allows checking the software/firmware version of the equipment. The choice of the command opens the dialogue window shown in Figure 11. Warning. It is possible to open more Equipment Software Version windows relevant to different equipment.

If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the push-buttons present into the Equipment Software Version window, it is possible: •

to update the so ftware/firmware (sw/fw) of the equipment The sw/fw of the equipment is the assembly of all the sw/fw necessary for the management of the entire equipment (sw/fw of the main controller sw/fw of the p eripheral units). The sw/fw of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory benches (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status 85. Each bench can contain one sw/fw version (also d ifferent from the other one) of the equipment. Warning. It is possible to update the sw/fw of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time. Then, it is possible to execute the updating of the sw/fw as with file present into the subject PC as using the file present into a remote machine (PC or workstation/server).

•

to switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main controller

86

Warning. The switching between the memory benches does not stop the traffic. •

to save, into a file, the information present in the Equipment Software Version window

87

85

Warning. Not all the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program are equipped with 2 memory banks. 86

Warning. Not all the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program are equipped with 2 memory banks. In this case, the operation under examination will not be available. 87

Warning. The system saves the configuration file in text format. Use FixedSys font, in order to show the file with Notepad editor.


69

Figure 11


If the operator has not set any identification code, the program points out the IP address (SNMP agent).

(2)


(3)

The wording: •

Running, points out that it is on progress the sw/fw relevant to the subject memory bench.

•

Loaded, points out that the sw/fw is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress (standby).

•

Not Loaded, points out that the sw/fw is not present into the memory bench

•

Downloading, points out that it is on progress the updating of the sw/fw relevant to the memory bench.

88

.

88

If the wording is present into the Bench 2 box, it could also mean that the equipment type under examination is not equipped with 2 memory banks.

70


(4)

The list of the parts that compose the sw/fw of the equipment changes according to the type of the selected equipment

(5)

Usually the name points out the component type. The wording: •

FW_boot, points out the boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided with a version of the memory benches.

(6)

•

FW_appl, points out the application code.

•

conf_... or fpga..., points out the configuration file of the p rogrammable devices.

For the (FW…) codes, the system points out the version and also the relevant siae identification code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different code type).

To update the sw/fw of the equipment Warning. The program automatically updates the sw/fw of the memory bench not o n progress or not present (wording Loaded or Not Loaded - refer to Figure 11). It is not possible to execute such an operation (Download SW Setup push-button disabled) when the updating of the sw/fw is already on progress (wording Downloading). Then, it is necessary to point out that the sw/fw refresh procedure could change the equipment functions. 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Version command. The system displays the Equipment Software Version window. 4. Select the Download SW Setup push-button present into the Equipment Software Version window. The system displays the Download Setup dialogue window. 5. Set the server on which there is the sw/fw to be used for the updating. Select the following option push-button: •

•

Download from Local Host , if the sw/fw is present on the same PC on which it is loaded the actually used SCT/LMT program. Download from other domain, if the sw/fw is present on a different machine (PC, Server, Workstation, etc.). In this second case, it is necessary to set the IP address ( IP address box ) of the remote machine.

6. Set the path where there is the file into the Download file path box

89

.

Warning. If it is used the sw/fw present on a remote server (selected Download from other domain push-button) to set the path, respect the indication pointed out into the File for the sw/fw refresh present on a remote server paragraph. The View file description push-button allows displaying a brief description that describes the contents of the selected file. 7. Set the download type to be executed. Select the option push-button:

89

The files are identified by the .dwl extension and by a name composed by 8 characters. With details the:

-

1° character identifies the technology (S=SDH, P=PDH, M=PMP, etc.). 2° character identifies the equipment type (R=Radio, M=Multiplex). 3°..6° characters identify the product number. 7°, 8° characters identify the most meaningful digits of the version.


71

•

Forced, if the refresh procedure of the sw/fw relevant to the main controller of the equipment is on progress.

•

Only different or not present/peripheral, if the refresh procedure of the sw/fw relevant to peripheral units (FPGA file and/or application code) is on progress.

8. Activate the Bench switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the sw/fw that has been updated. 9. Choose the Start push-button and then confirm. Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be forwarded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal. The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment (pointed out by the first character of the file name). If the parameters result incompatible ones, the program does not executes the sw/fw updating. If the parameters result compatible ones, the system displays the Downloading window into which it is dynamically pointed out the component that the system is copying and the already copied percentage. Such an operation takes part some minutes. Warning. If the operator has selected the Download from Local Host push-button (refer to step 2), during such an operation, DO NO CLOSE the SCT/LMT program. Into the Downloading window, there is the Abort push-button, while into the Equipment Software Version window, it is available the Abort Download push-button 90. Both the push-buttons allows stopping the operation. Warning. During the updating, the system deletes the sw/fw present into the bench memory and it updates the sw/fw of the equipment one component at a time. If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated components. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the bench will be in Not Loaded status ). In this case, the main controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating of the firmware. If the operation has been successfully executed, into the Software Version box (refer to Figure 11), the system points out the new version of the sw/fw. If it is not successfully executed according to the equipment type, into the Software Version box, it remains pointed out the “old” version or it is displayed the wording Not loaded.

To switch the functioning of the memory benches Warning. It is not possible to switch the memory bench (the Bench switch command is disabled) when the updating of the sw/fw is on progress (wording Downloading - refer to Figure 11) and when the sw/fw of the equipment is not present into a bench (wording Not Loaded). The switching between the memory benches DOES NOT stop the traffic. 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Version command. The system displays the Equipment Software Version window. 4. Select the Bench switch push-button. 5. Confirm the operation. The bench on Running status is forced on Loaded status and vice versa.

90

The choice of this push-button needs for the confirmation.

72


To save, into a file, the information present in the Equipment Software Version window 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Version command. The system displays the Equipment Software Version window. 4. Select the Export to File push-button. The system displays the Export Software version window. 5. Type, into the proper box, the file name (with extension .txt) and set the path where such a file has to be saved. 6. Choose the Save push-button.

File for the refresh procedure of the sw/fw present on a remote server The siae equipment, managed by the SCT/LMT, use for the file transfer the FTP protocol (File Transfer Protocol). According to such a protocol, the system uses the Anonymous user for the connection with the remote machine. If the remote machine is a PC with Windows operating system (95, 98, NT, ME, XP, 2000), before setting the path that contains the file (step 3 of the procedure To refresh the equipment sw/fw), check that: −

The PC has been turned-on;

−

The folder that contains the file for the refresh procedure is a shared one;

−

The SCT/LMT program has been started-up in such a way to be able to use the FTP available for the program.

At the end of the checks, type, into the Download file path box (Download Setup window ), the complete path where there is the download file, according to the syntax of the operating system of the remote machine (Windows); for instance C:\file_fw\01.dw. If the remote machine is a workstation/server with Unix operating system, before setting the path that contains the file (step 3 of the procedure To refresh the equipment sw/fw), check that: −

The server has been turned-o;

−

It is present the “anonymous ftp” service;

−

The network administrator has created the ftp user and enabled it for the file downloading/loading procedure.

At the end of the checks, the path to be typed into the Download file path box (Download Setup window ), depends on the setting executed for the ftp user by the network administrator. If it has been defined a folder to which the ftp user directly points, it is necessary to type, according to the syntax of the operating system relevant to the remote machine (Unix), the path where there is the download file excluding the pre-defined part; for instance if the pr e-defined folder is home/ftp and the download file is into the folder home/ftp/equipment/01.dwl , into the Download file path box, type only /equipment/01.dwl. If it has not been defined any folder, type the co mplete path. For more d etailed information concerning the FTP, refer to the help on line of the available operating system and to the subject network administrator.


73

5.5.8

Equipment - Performances




The Performances command displays the list of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements, available for the selected equipment type, that allow the control of the signal quality. Warning. If the command is not available, it means that for the selected equipment type are not foreseen PM measurements.

A PM measurement consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of specific parameters 91 (BER, error counting, etc.). Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can be changed). The exceeding of the threshold limit points out a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition creates an alarm that is stored and managed by the equipment and by the SCT/LMT as every other alarm (more info).

The choice of the command opens the window shown in Figure 12. It is possible to open more Performances windows relevant to different equipment. Warning. If the equipment is in Connected status (monitor or login) and at the choice of the command, the system displays the message “No instances available for this performance” , it means that the sw/fw, present into the selected equipment, does not support the PM measurements. Check the version of the sw/fw and if it is necessary update it.

If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the push-buttons present into the Performances window , it is possible: •

to activate a PM measurement

•

to deactivate a PM measurement

•

to display the results of every measurement, the status of the threshold exceeding alarms and to set the intervention thresholds of the relevant alarms.

91

The parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measurement type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measurements refer to ITU-T Recommendations (for instance G.826, G.821, etc.).

74


Figure 12


If the operator has not set any network identification code, the program points out the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.

(2)


(3)

With details: •

PM measurements for the US radio equipment (SDH)

•

PM measurements for the EL radio equipment (PDH)

•

PM measurements for the PDH-AL radio equipment (PDH)

•

PM measurements for the ADM-C multiplexer equipment (SDH)

Warning. The + symbol can be on the left side of the some records. These records aren’t a measurement 92, but they are a group of measurements; in fact the system display a list to their selection. When it is selected, the symbol + is replaced by the symbol -. The choice of this last symbol compress again the list. It’s possible to expand/compress a list selecting twice the +/- symbol or selecting the Expand/Collapse push-button displayed on the “expandable” record selected. (4)

The wording: •

Stopped, points out that the PM measurement has not been activated. In this case selecting a measurement, the label of the first push-button on the right is Start.

•

Running, points out that the PM measurement has been activated. In this status, selecting a measurement, the label of the first push-button on the right is Stop.

92

For this record, the system doesn’t show a wording in Status field.


75

To activate a PM measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the measurement in Stopped status to be activated. 5. Select the Start push-button and confirm. The measurement is started-up and its status switches from Stopped to Running.

To deactivate a PM measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the record relevant to the measurement in Running status to be deactivated. 5. Select the Stop push-button and confirm. The measurement is stopped and its status switches from Running to Stopped.

To display the results of a PM measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the record relevant to the measurement. 5. Select the Show push-button or click twice quickly on the record itself. The system opens a window that points out the results of the measurements by means of graphical format or by means of table format and the status of the alarms relevant to the exceeding of the threshold limits. Warning. If the measurement has never been activated, the window will result empty. The commands present into window allows executing the following operations: •

•

to reset the values of the control parameters stored into the equipment and displayed into the window. to execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding

93

.

93

The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the program as normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind o f alarms.

76


•

to activate/deactivate the measurement.

•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms.

Warning. The contents of the window and the control parameters change according to the selected equipment type and to the selected measurement type. With details: •

PM measurements for the US radio equipment (SDH)

•

PM measurements for the EL radio equipment (PDH)

•

PM measurements for the PDH-AL radio equipment (PDH)

•

PM measurements for the ADM-C multiplexer equipment (SDH)

Warning. Into the window, the possibility to forward commands or to change the thresholds of the control parameters is affected by the profile of the user who has requested the equipment “login”. The user with Read only profile can check the parameters but he can not change them (the Apply push-button is disabled). While the user with Read and write, Station operator or System profile can as check as change the values of the parameters, and he can execute testing and control operations. It is not possible to change the parameters if the connection between the program and the equipment has been lost.

PM measurements (more info) The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measurements can be executed only after a command forwarded by the user.

When it has been activated a PM measurement, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measurements are sub-divided into records. Each record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period). If at the end of the observation period, the measurement has not yet been deactivated the system starts another observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measurement. The Siae equipment group the results of the PM measurements into observation period of 15 minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records).

The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measurement is activated but such records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour of the solar day (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the daily records, to the time 00.00 of the solar day. For instance, if a measurement starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time 11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record will have as observation period 11.40...00.00.

When it has been activated the connection between the SCT/LMT and an equipment, such an equipment (when the user asks for the displaying of the results) forwards the primary and daily records relevant to the PM measurements on progress. For each type of measurement, the equipment keeps stored and communicates to the SCT/LMT the current records and also the last 16 primary records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day). The preceding records are overwritten. When the operator stops a measurement, the system forwards the uncompleted current record to the program.


77

If the operator activates and deactivates the measurement more times during the same observation period, the system will forward to the program the record that contains the results of the last executed measurement. For instance if the measurement has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the measurements relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.02...9.07 will not be for warded.

If an equipment has some PM measurements on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will successively restarted or turned on the measurements activated before the turning off will be automatically re-started. The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measurement has been stopped, will result empty and when it has been reached the limit of 16 pr imary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the preceding records.

78


5.5.8.1 PM Measurements for the US radio equipment

The US radio equipment, realized by Siae Microelettronica, support the following PM (Performance Monitoring) measurements: •

G826SMstB2M1 Line. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal at line side. The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T: −

Byte B2 ............ BBE, ES, SES, UAS

−

Byte M1 ............ BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE

−

Byte B2 e M1..... UASBIDI

Warning. The B2 and M1 bytes are used, for the measurement of the parameters only if the following alarms HAVE NOT BEEN activated: Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame, B2 Excessive Ber, J0 Path Trace Mismatch, Ms Ais. •

G826SMstB2M1 Radio. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal at radio side. The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T: −


−


−


Warning. The B2 and M1 bytes are used, for the measurement of the parameters only if the following alarms HAVE NOT BEEN activated: Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, J0 Path Trace Mismatch Alarm, Ms Ais Alarm. Warning. The G826SMstB2M1 Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the G826SMstB2M1 Radio 1 and G826SMstB2M1 Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration. •

G826SRstB1 Line. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal at line side. The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OOFS quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T.

•

G826SRstB1 Radio. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal at radio side. The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OOFS quality parameters specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T. Warning. The G826SRstB1 Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the G826SRstB1 Radio 1 and G826SRstB1 Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

•

RxPwr Radio. This measurement checks the power of the signal at reception. The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI. Warning. The RxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the RxPwr Radio 1 and RxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

•

TxPwr Radio. This measurement checks the power of the signal at transmission. The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI. Warning. The TxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the TxPwr Radio 1 and TxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

•

G826Vc12Path A (Tug3=B Tug2=C Tug12=D). This measurement checks the quality of the received signal at tributary (2Mbit/s). The check consists of measuring the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI, BBE, BBE FE quality parameters specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T. Warning. Into the measurement name the A – D letters mean: A –> tributary number, B -> Tributary Unit Group-3 number, C -> Tributary Unit Group-2 number, D -> Tributary Unit Group-12 number.


79

Quality parameters description 94

•

BBE (Background Block Errors). Number of blocks errored bit not belonging to SES.

•

BBE FE (Background Block Errors Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.

•

ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.

•

ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote blocks.

•

OOFS (Out of Frame Seconds). The second that do not belong to UAS but with the Out OF Frame Alarm activated.

•

RLTM (Received Level Tide Mark). It records the maximum value (TMMax) and the minimum one (TMMin) reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours).

•

RLTS (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.

•

SES (Severely Errored Seconds). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks ≥ N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, J0 Path Trace Mismatch Alarm, Ms Ais Alarm).

•

SES FE (Severely Errored Seconds Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks ≥ N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).

•

•

where it has been detected at least one

TLTM (Transmitted Level Tide Mark). It records the maximum value (TMMax) and the minimum one (TMMin) reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). TLTS (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the predefined threshold level. It is possible to d efine up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.

•

UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.

•

UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.

•

UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.

G826SMstB2M1 Line The selection of the G826SMstB2M1 Line option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the window shown in Figure 13. The commands present into the G826SMstB2M1 Line window, allows executing the following operations:

94

The wording block refers to a group of bit.

80


•

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and displayed into the window.

•

to execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding

95

Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS, UAS FE, UASBIDI alarms. 96

•

to activate /deactivate the measurement

.

•

to change the type of the displayed control parameters Into the same window, the system does not point out the results concerning all the control parameters. Such ones have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks.

•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Warning. The change of a threshold, automatically changes the value of the same threshold for the parameters/alarms of the G826SMstB2M1_Radio measurement.

•

to change the displaying of the result switching from the graphical format to the table one or vice versa

Figure 13

95

The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the program as normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms. 96

It is possible to activate/deactivate the measurement also into the Performances window.


81



(2)

The wording:

(3)

•

[Running], points out that the measurement is on progress.

•

[Stopped], points out that the measurement is not on progress.

The choice of the: • •

Clear Counters menu, resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary) stored into the equipment and displayed into the window.

•

Clear Alarms menu, executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding.

•

Stop/Start menus, allow deactivating (Stop push-button ) or activating again (Start push-button ) the measurement.

•

PM Config menu, opens the G826 SMst B2 M1 Common window. Into such a window, the operator can set the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.

•

Table View/Chart View menu, points out the displaying type of the results and it allows changing it. With details:

•

(4)

Refresh menu, executes the new reading of the data from the equipment.

−

the Table View label, points out that the results are represented by means of a graphic diagram; The choice of the push-button switches the displaying type from graphical diagram to table.

−

the Chart View label, points out that the results are represented by means of a table; The choice of the push-button switches the displaying type from table to graphical diagram.

Seconds/Blocks menu. With details: −

the Seconds label, points out that into the figure there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.

−

the Blocks label, points out that into the figure there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring unit.

Each box represents an alarm. With details the boxes have the following meanings: •

15 M ... boxes, point out the threshold exceeding of the relevant control parameters into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

•

24 H ... boxes, point out the threshold exceeding of the relevant control parameters into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) pr esent into the window.

•

UAS ... box, points out the unavailability alarm.

The colour of the boxes represents the status of the alarm and the seriousness level coupled by the user with the alarm itself. With details:

(5)

−

red - alarm activated coupled with the Critical seriousness level.

−

orange - alarm activated coupled with the Major seriousness level.

−

yellow - alarm activated coupled with the Minor seriousness level.

−

light blue - alarm activated coupled with the Warning seriousness level.

−

green - alarm activated coupled with the Status seriousness level.

−

grey - alarm deactivated.

Into this area, the system displays, by means of a graphical (as shown in figure) or a table format, the results of the daily and primary records relevant to the measurement to which the window refers. The detailed description of the contents relevant to this area is reported in following Figure 14. Warning. For each measurement, the system provides as available the current records, the last 16 primary records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily record (corresponding to the previous day).

82


Figure 14


83


The position of the bar on the vertical axis points out the daily or primary record to which it is referred. With details: •

The Curr Day wording, points out the current daily record (24 hours).

•

The Last Day wording, points out the preceding daily record.

•

The R3 wording, points out the current primary record (15 minutes).

•

The R4... R19 wordings, point out the preceding 16 primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).

The colour of the bar po ints out the control parameter that corresponds to the value. The key of the parameters and of the relevant colours is always pointed out under the graphical drawing. The displayed parameters changes according to the measurement type. The height of the bar points out the value reached by the parameter into the specific observation period (record). The measuring unit of the vertical axis changes according to the type of the parameters represented into the diagram. The scale of the vertical axes changes dynamically according to the size of the represented values. (2)

The box/wording: •

ML - Meaningless (green). It points out that the record has been completely acquired and the measurement is not affected by errors.

•

MF - Meaningful (green). It points out that the record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value.

•

IN - Incomplete (yellow). It points out that the record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measurement starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. Warning. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day.

•

LO - Lost (red). It points out that the record has not r eached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.

•

RE - Restarted (red). It points out that the record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measurement is activated for a certain measurement point, all the record coupled with such a measurement point will result in this status.

Warning. The box --- (grey), points out that the record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measurement was not activated. (3)

Each column represents a daily or primary record. With details: •

The Curr Day column, points out the current daily record (24 hours).

•

The Last Day column, points out the preceding daily record.

•

The Current 15 column, points out the current primary record (15 minutes).

•

The 15 ... 240 columns, point out the 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).

The Type column, points out the control parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. The listed parameters changes according to the measurement type.

84


To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the Clear Counters push-button and confirm. The values displayed into the graphical diagram or into the table (according to the displaying format) are reset.

To execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the Clear Alarms push-button and confirm. All the activated alarm status boxes (15 M.... and/or 24 H....) are deactivated.

To activate the measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the Start push-button and confirm. The measurement is started-up.

To deactivate the measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement.


85

The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the Stop push-button and confirm. The measurement is stopped.

To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the arrow present on the side of the text box and choose from the list: •

•

the Seconds, option to display the results of the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE and UASBIDI parameters. the Blocks, option to display the results of the BBE, BBE FE parameters.

To change the data displaying format 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. To change the data displaying format from: •

graphical format to table one, select the Table View push-button.

•

table format to graphical one select the Chart View push-button.

To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. The system displays the G826 SMst B2 M1 Common window that contains the following cards: •

General. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the UAS, UAS FE, SES, and SES FE parameters. With details into: −

86

The N Ses Set UAS (P) box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES (or SES FE) - over which starts the UAS (or UAS FE) unavailability period.


To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 10 sec. −

The N Ses Reset UAS (Q) box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES (or SES FE) - over which ends the UAS (or UAS FE) unavailability period. To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 10 sec.

−

The N BBE Set Ses box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES (or a SES FE). To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 100 %.

•

15 M Es. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Es alarm. With details: −

into the 15 M Es Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 15 M Es Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•

15 M Es FE. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Es FE alarm. With details: −

into the 15 M Es FE Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 15 M Es FE Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES FE has occurred over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•

15 M Ses. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Ses alarm. With details: −

into the 15 M Ses Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 15 M Ses Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES has occurred over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•

15 M Ses FE. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Ses FE alarm. With details: −

into the 15 M Ses FE Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 15 M Ses FE Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•

24 H Es. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Es alarm. With details: −

into the 24 H Es Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 24 H Es Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm.


87

To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value. •

24 H Es FE. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Es FE alarm. With details: −

into the 24 H Es FE Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 24 H Es FE Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•

24 H Ses. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Ses alarm. With details: −

into the 24 H Ses Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 24 H Ses Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•

24 H Ses FE. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Ses FE alarm. With details: −

into the 24 H Ses FE Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 24 H Ses FE Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•

UAS. Into this card, it is possible to check and to set out the seriousness coupled with the UAS alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button into the UAS Alarm Severity area.

•

UAS FE. Into this card, it is possible to check and to set out the seriousness coupled with the UAS FE alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button into the UAS FE Alarm Severity area.

•

UASBIDI. Into this card, it is possible to check and to set out the seriousness coupled with the UASBIDI alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button into the UASBidi Alarm Severity area..

6. To make active the changing, press the Apply push-button and confirm. The choice of the Refresh button restore the values set at the opening of the window.

G826SMstB2M1 Radio The selection of the G826SMstB2M1 Radio… option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the G826SMstB2M1 Radio… window. Warning. The G826SMstB2M1 Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the G826SMstB2M1 Radio 1 and G826SMstB2M1 Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

88


The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G826SMstB2M1 Line measurement (refer to Figure 13).

The commands present into the G826SMstB2M1 Radio… window, allows executing the following operations: •


•


95


•


.

•


•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Warning. The change of a threshold, automatically changes the value of the same threshold for the parameters/alarms of the G826SMstB2M1 Line measurement.

•


The procedures to execute G826SMstB2M1 Line.

every

operation

are

the

same

ones

reported

at

paragraph

G826SRstB1 Line The selection of the G826SRstB1 Line option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the G826SRstB1 Line window. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G826SMstB2M1 Line measurement (refer to Figure 13).

The commands present into the G826SRstB1 Line window allows executing the following operations: •


•


95

Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS alarm. 96

•


•

to change the type of the displayed control parameters Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. With details, if into the menu bar it is present the Seconds push-button, the system displays into the figure the ES, SES, UAS, OOFS control parameters. If it is present the Blocks pushbutton, the system displays the BBE parameter.

•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Into the procedure, at the choice of the PM Config command, the system displays the G826SRst B1 Common window. Into such a window there are the following cards: General, 15 M Es, 15 M Ses, 24 H Es, 24 h Ses and UAS.


89

Warning. The change of a threshold, automatically changes the value of the same threshold for the parameters/alarms of the G826SRstB1 Radio measurement. •



every

operation

are

the

same

ones

reported

at

paragraph

G826SRstB1 Radio The selection of the G826SRstB1 Radio… option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the G826SRstB1 Radio… window. Warning. The G826SRstB1 Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the G826SRstB1 Radio 1 and G826SRstB1 Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G826SMstB2M1 Line measurement (refer to Figure 13).

The commands present into the G826SRstB1 Radio… window allows executing the following operations: •

•

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and d isplayed into the window. to execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 95 Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS alarm. 96

•


.

•

to change the type of the displayed control parameters Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. With details, if into the menu bar it is present the Seconds push-button, the system displays into the figure the ES, SES, UAS, OOFS control parameters. If it is present the Blocks pushbutton, the system displays the BBE parameter.

•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Into the procedure, at the choice of the PM Config command, the system displays the G826SRst B1 Common window. Into such a window there are the following cards: General, 15 M Es, 15 M Ses, 24 H Es, 24 h Ses and UAS. Warning. The change of a threshold, automatically changes the value of the same threshold for the parameters/alarms of the G826SRstB1 Line measurement.

•



every

operation

are

the

same

ones

reported

at

paragraph

RxPwr Radio The selection of the RxPwr Radio… option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the window shown in Figure 15.

90


Warning. The RxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the RxPwr Radio 1 and 1 and RxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

The commands present into the RxPwr Radio… window, Radio… window, allows executing the following operations: •

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and displayed into the window

•


•

to activate /deactivate /deactivate the the measurement

•

to change the type of the displayed control parameters

95

96

Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the above listed parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dBm. •

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the relevant alarms

•


The procedures to execute every operation are the same ones G826SMstB2M1 Line , with , with the exception of the ones reported here below.

reported

at

paragraph

Figure 15


91

Notes of Figure of Figure 15 (1)


(2)

The wording:

(3)

•

[Running], points [Running], points out that the measurement is on progress.

•

[Stopped], points [Stopped], points out that the measurement is not on progress.

The choice of the: •

Refresh menu, Refresh menu, executes the new reading of the data from the equipment.

•

Clear Counters menu, Counters menu, resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary) stored into the equipment and displayed into the window.

•

Clear Alarms Alarms menu, executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding.

•

Stop/Start Stop/Start menus, allow deactivating (Stop (Stop push-button ) ) or activating again (Start (Start push-button ) the ) the measurement.

•

Seconds/Powers menu. With details: −

the Seconds label, points out that into the figure there are the RLTS1, RLTS2, RLTS3, RLTS4 control RLTS4 control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit. unit.

−

the Powers Powers label, points out that into the figure there are the TMMax, TMMin control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.

•

PM Config menu, Config menu, opens the Rx Pwr SDH Common window. Common window. Into such a window, the operator can set the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the quality parameters.

•

Table View/Chart View View menu, points out the displaying type of the results and it allows changing it. With details: −

−

(4)

the the Table View label, points out that the results are represented by means of a graphic diagram; The choice of the push-button switches the displaying type from graphical diagram to table. the Chart View label, points out that the results are represented by means of a table; The choice of the push-button switches the displaying type from table to graphical diagram.

Each box represents an alarm relevant to the threshold exceeding. With details the boxes have the following meanings: •

15 M ... boxes, ... boxes, point out the threshold exceeding of the relevant control parameters into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

•

24 H ... boxes, ... boxes, point out the threshold exceeding of the relevant control parameters into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

The colour of the boxes represents the status of the alarm and the seriousness level coupled by the user with the alarm itself. With details: −


−

orange orange - alarm activated coupled with the Major seriousness level. level.

−

yellow - alarm activated coupled with the Minor seriousness level. level.

−

light blue blue - alarm activated coupled with the Warning seriousness level. level.

−

green green - alarm activated coupled with the Status seriousness level. level.

−

grey - alarm deactivated. deactivated.

(5)

Each box points out the power threshold level actually set. This parameter can be configured by the user.

(6)

The results of the measurements can be displayed by means of a graphical format (refer to figure) or by means of a table one. The detailed description of the contents relevant to this area is reported in Figure 14. 14.

92


To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances Performances command command.. The system displays the Performances window. Performances window. 4. Select the desired RxPwr Radio... measurement. Radio... measurement. The system displays the RxPwr Radio… window. Radio… window. 5. Select the arrow placed placed on the side of the text box and choose from from the list: •

the Seconds, Seconds, option to display the results of the RLTS1, RLTS2, RLTS3, RLTS4 parameters.

•

the Powers, Powers , option to display the results of the TMMax, TMMin parameters.

To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances Performances command command.. The system displays the Performances window. Performances window. 4. Select the desired RxPwr Radio... measurement. Radio... measurement. The system displays the RxPwr Radio… window. Radio… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. Config push-button. The system displays the Rx Pwr SDH Common window Common window that contains the following cards: •

15 M Rlts. Rlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Rlts.... alarms. With details: −

into the Rlts 1 (Thresholds area ) ) box, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−

into the Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than the RLT2, RLT3, RLT4 threshold levels over which the system activates the relevant alarms. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlts 1 card.

−

into the Alarm Severity area, area, it is pointed out the seriousness level coupled with the alarms: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. or Critical. To change the parameter, select the desired option push-button.

•

24 H Rlts. Rlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Rlts.... alarms. With details: −

into the Rlts 1 (Thresholds area ) ) box, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of sec., inside a period of 24 hours, when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−

into the Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours,


93

when the received power is lower than the RLT2, RLT3, RLT4 threshold levels over which the system activates the relevant alarms. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlts 1 card. −


•

Rlt. Rlt. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the r eceived power. With details: −

the Rlt 1 dBm dBm cursor points out the first threshold level of the received power. To change the parameters move the cursor over the desired value. Choosing the Default push-button, Default push-button, it is possible to restore the standard value.

−

the Rlt 2..., Rlt 3..., Rlt 4... cursors 4... cursors respectively point out the second, the third and the fourth threshold level of the received power. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlt 1 card. card.

6. To make active the changing, press the Apply push-button and confirm. The choice of the Refresh push-button Refresh push-button restore the values set at the opening of the window.

TxPwr Radio The selection of the the TxPwr Radio… Radio… option present into the Performances Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command Show command opens the TxPwr Radio… window. Radio… window. Warning. The TxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the TxPwr Radio 1 and 1 and TxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 co nfiguration.

The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the RxPwr Radio measurement Radio measurement (refer to Figure 15) 15).

The commands present into the TxPwr Radio… window Radio… window allows executing the following operations: •

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and d isplayed into the window.

•

to execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 95

•

to activate /deactivate /deactivate the the measurement

•


96

Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the above listed parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dBm. With details, if into the menu bar it is present the Seconds push-button, the system displays into the figure the Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts4 control parameters. If it is present the Powers push-button, the system displays the TMMax, TMMin parameters. TMMin parameters. •

to set the thresholds of some control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms

•

to change the displaying of the result switching from the graphical format to the table one or vice versa. versa.

The procedures to execute every operation are the same ones G826SMstB2M1 Line , with , with the exception of the ones reported here below.

94

reported

at

paragraph


To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances Performances command command.. The system displays the Performances window. Performances window. 4. Select the desired TxPwr Radio... measurement. measurement. The system displays the TxPwr Radio… window. Radio… window. 5. Select the arrow placed placed on the side of the the push-button and and choose from the list: •

the Seconds, Seconds, option to display the results of the TLTS1, TLTS2, TLTS3, TLTS4 parameters.

•

the Powers, Powers , option to display the results of the TMMax, TMMin parameters.

To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioSDH or SDH IDU-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances Performances command command.. The system displays the Performances window. Performances window. 4. Select the desired TxPwr Radio... measurement. measurement. The system displays the TxPwr Radio… window. Radio… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. Config push-button. The system displays the Tx Pwr SDH Common window Common window that contains the following cards: •

15 M Tlts. Tlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Tlts.... alarms. With details: −

into the Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the transmitted power is lower than the TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−


•

24 H Tlts. Tlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of 24 H Tlts.... alarms. With details: −

into the Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the r elevant alarms. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−


•

Tlt. Tlt. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the transmitted power. With details: −

the Tlt 1 dBm dBm cursor, points out the first threshold level of the transmitted power.


95

To change the parameters move the cursor over the desired value. Choosing the Default push-button, it is possible to restore the standard value. −

the Tlt 2..., Tlt 3..., Tlt 4... cursors, r espectively point out the second, the third and the fourth threshold level of the transmitted power. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Tlt 1 card.

6. To make active the changing, press the Apply push-button and confirm. The choice of the Refresh push-button restore the values set at the opening of the window.

G826Vc12Path… (Tug3=… Tug2=… Tug12=…) The selection of the G826Vc12Path A (Tug3=B Tug2=C Tug12=D) 97 option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the G826Vc12Path… (Tug3=… Tug2=… Tug12=…) window. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G826SMstB2M1 Line measurement (refer to Figure 13).

The commands present into the G826Vc12Path… (Tug3=… Tug2=… Tug12=…) window allows executing the following operations: •

•


•


•

to change the type of the displayed control parameters Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. With details, if into the menu bar it is present the Seconds push-button, the system displays into the figure the ES, SES, UAS, ESFE, SESFE, UASFE, UASBIDI control parameters. If it is present the Blocks push-button, the system displays the BBE and BBEFE parameters.

•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Into the procedure, at the choice of the PM Config command, the system displays the G826SRst B1 Common window. Into such a window there are the following cards: General, 15 M Es, 15 M Es FE, 15 M Ses, 15 M Ses FE, 24 H Es, 24 H Es FE, 24 H Ses, 24 H Ses FE , UAS, UAS FE and UAS Bidi .

•



every

operation

are

the

same

ones

reported

at

paragraph

97

Into the measurement name the A – D letters mean: A –> tributary number, B -> Tributary Unit Group-3 number, C -> Tributary Unit Group-2 number, D -> Tributary Unit Group-12 number.

96


5.5.8.2 PM Measurements for the EL radio equipment

The EL radio equipment, realized by Siae Microelettronica, support the following PM (Performance Monitoring) measurements: •

G826 Radio. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, UAS quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU. Warning. The G826 Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the G826S Radio 1 and G826 Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

•

RxPwr Radio. This measurement checks the power of the signal at reception. The check consists of measuring the RTLS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI. Warning. The RxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the RxPwr Radio 1 and RxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.


•



•


•


•


•

SES (Severely Errored Seconds). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks ≥ N% (the N value can be configured).

•


G826 Radio The selection of the G826 Radio… option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the window shown in Figure 16. Warning. The G826 Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the G826S Radio 1 and G826 Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

98



97

The commands present into the G826 Radio… window, allows executing the following operations: •

•


•


.

•


•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms

•


Figure 16

99

The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the prog ram as normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms. 100


98



If the operator has not set any identification code, the program points out the IP address (agent SNMP).

(2)

The wording:

(3)

•


•



Clear Counters menu, resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary) stored into the equipment and d isplayed into the window.

•


•


•

PM Config menu, opens the G826 Common window. Into such a window, the operator can set the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.

•


•

(4)


−


−




−

the Blocks label, points out that into the figure there is the control parameter that use the blocks as measuring unit.


•

•

15 M ... boxes, point out the threshold exceeding of the relevant control parameters into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window. 24 H ... boxes, point out the threshold exceeding of the relevant control parameters into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) pr esent into the window. UAS ... box, points out the unavailability alarm.


(5)

−


−


−


−


−


−

grey - alarm d eactivated.

Into this area, the system displays, by means of a graphical (as shown in figure) or a table format, the results of the daily and primary records relevant to the measurement to which the window refers. The detailed description of the contents relevant to this area is reported in the following Figure 17. Warning. For each measurement, the system provides as available the current records, the last 16 primary records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily record (corresponding to the previous day).


99

Figure 17

100





•


•


•


The colour of the bar points out the control parameter that corresponds to the value. The key of the parameters and of the relevant colours is always pointed out under the graphical drawing. The displayed parameters changes according to the measurement type. The height of the bar points out the value reached by the parameter into the specific observation period (record). The measuring unit of the vertical axis changes according to the type of the parameters represented into the diagram. The scale of the vertical axes changes dynamically according to the size of the represented values. (2)



•


•

IN - Incomplete (yellow). It points out that the record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measurement starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. Warning. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 o f each day.

•

LO - Lost (red). It points out that the record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.

•





•


•


•


The Type column, points out the status of measurement and the control parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. The listed parameters changes according to the measurement type.


101

To reset the values of the records (daily and pr imary) 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. Select the Clear Counters push-button and confirm. The values displayed into the graphical diagram or into the table (according to the displaying format) are reset.

To execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. Select the Clear Alarms push-button and confirm. All the activated alarm status boxes (15 M.... and/or 24 H....) are deactivated.

To activate the measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. Select the Start push-button and confirm. The measurement is started-up.

To deactivate the measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. Select the Stop push-button and confirm. The measurement is stopped.

102


To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the G826 Radio… measurement. The system displays the G826 Radio… window. 5. Select the arrow present on the side of text box and choose from the list: •

the Seconds option, to display the results of the ES, SES, UAS parameters.

•

the Blocks option, to display the results of the BBE parameter.

To change the data d isplaying format 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. To change the data displaying format from: •


•


To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the G826 Radio… measurement. The system displays the G826 Radio… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. The system displays the G826 Common window that contains the following cards: •

General. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters (refer to the description of the parameters at the beginning of the chapter). With details into: −

the N Ses Set UAS (P) box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period. To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 10 sec.

−

the N Ses Reset UAS (Q) box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period. To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 10 sec.

−

the N BBE Set Ses box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES. To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 100 %.


103

•



−


•



−


•



−

into the 24 H Es Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•



−


•


•

Block Frame. Into this card, it is present a cursor for each capacity supported by the connected equipment 101. For every capacity (on the relevant cursor), it is reported the number of frames that compose the block (Value field). The block constitutes the base unit used for the processing of the quality parameters (G.826 Racc.). To change the value, move the cursor on the desired number of frames.


101

For example, for the medium capacity equipment, the 8x2Mb/s and 16x2Mb/s boxes will be present.

104


RxPwr Radio The selection of the RxPwr Radio… option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the dialogue window shown in Figure 18. Warning. The RxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the RxPwr Radio 1 and RxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

The commands present into the RxPwr Radio… window, allows executing the following operations: •

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and displayed into the window

•


•


•


95

96



•


The procedures to execute every operation are the same ones reported at paragraph G826 Radio , with the exception of the ones reported here below.

Figure 18


105


If the operator has not set any network identification code, the program points out the IP address (agent SNMP) of the equipment.

(2)

The wording:

(3)

•


•




•


•


•

PM Config menu, opens the Pw Rx Common dialogue window. Into such a window, the operator can set the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the quality parameters.

•

Table View/Chart View menu points out the displaying type of the results and it allows changing it. With details:

•

(4)


−


−


Rlts/TM menu. With details: −

the Rlts label, points out that into the figure there are the RLTS1, RLTS2, RLTS3, RLTS4 control parameters.

−

the TM label, points out that into the figure there are the TMMax, TMMin control parameters.



•




−


−


−


−


−


(5)


(6)

The results of the measurements can be displayed by means of a graphical format (refer to figure) or by means of a table one. The detailed description of the contents relevant to this area is reported in Figure 17.

106


To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the G826 Radio… measurement. The system displays the G826 Radio… window. 5. Select the arrow placed on the side of text box and choose from the list: •

the Rlts option, to display the results of the RLTS1, RLTS2, RLTS3, RLTS4 parameters.

•

the TM option, to display the results of the TMMax, TMMin parameters.

To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the G826 Radio… measurement. The system displays the G826 Radio… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. The system displays the Pw Rx Common window, that contains the following cards: •

15 M Rlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Rlts.... alarms. With details: −

into the Rlts 1 (Thresholds area ) box, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−

into the Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than the RLT2, RLT3, RLT4 threshold levels over which the system activates the relevant alarms. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlts 1 card.

−

into the Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness level coupled with the alarms: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter, select the desired option push-button.

•

24 H Rlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Rlts.... alarms. With details: −

into the Rlts 1 (Thresholds area ) box, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of sec., inside a period of 24 hours, when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−

into the Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the received power is lower than the RLT2, RLT3, RLT4 threshold levels over which the system activates the relevant alarms.


107

The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlts 1 card. −


•

Rlt. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the received power. With details: −

the Rlt 1 dBm cursor, points out the first threshold level of the received power. To change the parameters move the cursor over the desired value. Choosing the Default push-button, it is possible to restore the standard value.

−

the Rlt 2..., Rlt 3..., Rlt 4... cursors, respectively point out the second, the third and the fourth threshold level of the received power. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlt 1 card.


5.5.8.3 PM Measurements for the PDH-AL radio equipment

The PDH-AL radio equipment, realized by Siae Microelettronica, support the following PM (Performance Monitoring) measurements: •

G828 Radio. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.828 of the ITU. Warning. The G828 Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the G828 Radio 1 and G828 Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.

•

G828 Radio After Switch. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal downstream the radio switching. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.828 of the ITU.

•

G828 Line Side Tributary This measurement checks the quality of the received signal from a tributary (2Mbit/s) at line side 102. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.828 of the ITU.

•

G828 Radio Side Tributary. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal from a tributary (2Mbit/s) at radio side 102. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.828 of the ITU.

•

G828 Line Side Tributary Exp. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal from a tributary of the expansion 103 at line side 102. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.828 of the ITU.

•

G828 Radio Side Tributary Exp. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal from a tributary of the expansion 103 at radio side 102. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.828 of the ITU.

•

RxPwr Radio. This measurement checks the power of the signal at reception.

102

The tributary used for the measurement can be set by the user.

Warning. In order to execute this measurement, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the Rec. G.704. 103

Warning. The measurement is available only for equipment with 32x2Mb/s capacity.

108


The check consists of measuring the RTLS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI. Warning. The RxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the RxPwr Radio 1 and RxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration. •

TxPwr Radio. This measurement checks the power of the signal at transmission. The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI. Warning. The TxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the TxPwr Radio 1 and TxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration.


•



•


•


•


•

SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.

•

SES (Severely Errored Seconds). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks ≥ N% (the N value can be configured) o r an indication of alarm equivalent to an interruption of the reception (LOS, LOF, J0 Pathtrace Mismatch).

•

TLTM (Transmitted Level Tide Mark). It records the maximum value (TMMax) and the minimum one (TMMin) reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours).

•

TLTS (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the predefined threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.

•


G828 Radio The selection of the G828 Radio… option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the window shown in Figure 19. Warning. The G828 Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the G828 Radio 1 and G828 Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration. The commands present into the G828 Radio… window, allows executing the following operations: •


104



109

•

to execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 105 Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS alarm. 106

•


.

•


•

to set the thresholds of the control p arameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms

•


Figure 19

105



110



If the operator has not set any identification code, the program points out the IP address (agent SNMP).

(2)

The wording:

(3)

•


•




•


•


•


•

PM Config menu, opens the G828 Common window. Into such a window, the operator can set the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.

•


•

−


−



−

(4)

the Seconds label, points out that into the figure there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit. the Blocks label, points out that into the figure there is the control parameter that use the blocks as measuring unit.



•


•



(5)

−


−


−


−


−


−


Into this area, the system displays, by means of a graphical (as shown in figure) or a table format, the results of the daily and primary records relevant to the measurement to which the window refers. The detailed description of the contents relevant to this area is reported in the following Figure 20. Warning. For each measurement, the system provides as available the current records, the last 16 primary records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily record (corresponding to the previous day).


111

Figure 20

112





•


•


•





•


•

IN - Incomplete (yellow). It points out that the record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measurement starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. Warning. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day.

•


•





•


•


•


The Type column, points out the status of measurement and the control parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. The listed parameters changes according to the measurement type.


113

To reset the values of the records (daily and pr imary) 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. Select the Clear Counters push-button and confirm. The values displayed into the graphical diagram or into the table (according to the displaying format) are reset.

To execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. Select the Clear Alarms push-button and confirm. All the activated alarm status boxes (15 M.... and/or 24 H....) are deactivated.

To activate the measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. Select the Start push-button and confirm. The measurement is started-up.

To deactivate the measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. Select the Stop push-button and confirm. The measurement is stopped.

114


To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the G828 Radio… measurement. The system displays the G828 Radio… window. 5. Select the arrow present on the side of text box and choose from the list: •

the Seconds option, to display the results of the ES, SES, UAS, SEP parameters.

•

the Blocks option, to display the results of the BBE parameter.

To change the data d isplaying format 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired measurement. The system displays the window. 5. To change the data displaying format from: •


•


To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the G828 Radio… measurement. The system displays the G828 Radio… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. The system displays the G828 Common window that contains the following cards: •

General. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters (refer to the description of the parameters at the beginning of the chapter). With details into: −

the N Ses Set UAS (P) box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period. To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 10 sec.

−

the N Ses Reset UAS (Q) box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period. To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 10 sec.

−

the N BBE Set Ses box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES.


115

To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 100 %. •



−


•



−


•



−

into the 24 H Es Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•



−


•

UAS. Into this card, it is possible to check and to set o ut the seriousness coupled with the UAS alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button into the UAS Alarm Severity area.

•

15 M Sep. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Sep alarm. With details: −

into the 15 M Sep Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 15 M Sep Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SEP has occurred over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

116


•

24 H Sep. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Sep alarm. With details: −

into the 24 H Sep Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 24 H Sep Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•

2 Mb Selection. Into the subject card, the user can set the 2 Mbit tributary used for the calculation of the control parameters relevant to the G828 Line Side Tributary , G828 Radio Side Tributary, G828 Line Side Tributary Exp 103 and G828 Radio Side Tributary Exp 103 measurements. Warning. The 2 Mb Selection card is not available when the system uses as supervisory port an equipment tributary instead of the RS232 port. In such a case, the system automatically uses for the PM measurements, the same tributary used for the supervisory operations. To change the parameter, select the arrow, placed on the side of the 2Mb Selection box and choose the desired value from the list; the wording No 2Mb Used indicates the non selection of the tributary. Warning. The number of available tributaries changes according to the equipment capacity.


G828 Radio After Switch The selection of the G828 Radio After Switch option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the G828 Radio After Switch window. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G828 Radio measurement (refer to Figure 19).

The commands present into the G828 Radio After Switch window, allows executing the following operations: •


•


105

Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS alarm. •

to activate /deactivate the measurement 106.

•


• •

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms to change the displaying of the result switching from the graphical format to the table one or vice versa

The procedures to execute every operation are the same ones reported at paragraph G828 Radio.


117

G828 Line Side Tributary The selection of the G828 Line Side Tributary option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the G828 Line Side Tributary window. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G828 Radio measurement (refer to Figure 19), except for the 2Mb Selection box that indicates the tributary used for the measurement. In detail, the wording: −

Tributary…, indicates the flow used for the measurement.

−

No 2Mb Used, indicates that no tributary is set for the measurement.

The commands present into the G828 Line Side Tributary window, allows executing the following operations: •

•

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and d isplayed into the window. to execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 105 Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS alarm.

•


•


•


•

to set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measurement

•



G828 Radio Side Tributary The selection of the G828 Radio Side Tributary option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the G828 Radio Side Tributary window. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G828 Radio measurement (refer to Figure 19), except for the 2Mb Selection box that indicates the tributary used for the measurement. In detail, the wording: −


−


The commands present into the G828 Radio Side Tributary window, allows executing the following operations: •

•


•

118



•


•


•


•



G828 Radio Side Tributary The selection of the G828 Radio Side Tributary option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the G828 Radio Side Tributary window. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G828 Radio measurement (refer to Figure 19), except for the 2Mb Selection box that indicates the tributary used for the measurement. In detail, the wording: −


−


The commands present into the G828 Radio Side Tributary window, allows executing the following operations: •


•


105

Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS alarm. •


•


•


•


•



G828 Line Side Tributary Exp The selection of the G828 Line Side Tributary Exp 103 option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the G828 Line Side Tributary Exp window. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G828 Radio measurement (refer to Figure 19), except for the 2Mb Selection box that indicates the tributary used for the measurement. In detail, the wording:


119

−


−


The commands present into the G828 Line Side Tributary Exp window, allows executing the following operations: •

•


•


•


•


•


•



RxPwr Radio The selection of the RxPwr Radio… option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command, opens the dialogue window shown in Figure 21. Warning. The RxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the RxPwr Radio 1 and RxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration. The commands present into the RxPwr Radio… window, allows executing the following operations: •

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and d isplayed into the window

•


•


•


106



•



120


Figure 21


If the operator has not set any network identification code, the program points out the IP address (agent SNMP) of the equipment.

(2)

The wording:

(3)

•


•




•


•


•


•

PM Config menu, opens the Pw Rx Common dialogue window. Into such a window, the operator can set the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the quality parameters.

•

Table View/Chart View menu points out the displaying type of the results and it allows changing it. With details: −

−

•

the Table View label, points out that the results are represented by means of a graphic diagram; The choice of the push-button switches the displaying type from graphical diagram to table. the Chart View label, points out that the results are represented by means of a table; The choice of the push-button switches the displaying type from table to graphical diagram.

Rlts/TM menu. With details:


121

(4)

−

the Rlts label, points out that into the figure there are the RLTS1, RLTS2, RLTS3, RLTS4 control parameters.

−

the TM label, points out that into the figure there are the TMMax, TMMin control parameters.



•




−


−


−


−


−


(5)


(6)

The results of the measurements can be displayed by means of a graphical format (refer to figure) or by means of a table one. The detailed description of the contents relevant to this area is reported in Figure 20.

To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the G828 Radio… measurement. The system displays the G828 Radio… window. 5. Select the arrow placed on the side of text box and choose from the list: •

the Rlts option, to display the results of the RLTS1, RLTS2, RLTS3, RLTS4 parameters.

•

the TM option, to display the results of the TMMax, TMMin parameters.

To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the G828 Radio… measurement. The system displays the G828 Radio… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. The system displays the Pw Rx Common window, that contains the following cards: •

122

15 M Rlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Rlts.... alarms. With details:


−

into the Rlts 1 (Thresholds area ) box, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−

into the Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than the RLT2, RLT3, RLT4 threshold levels over which the system activates the relevant alarms. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlts 1 card.

−


•

24 H Rlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Rlts.... alarms. With details: −

into the Rlts 1 (Thresholds area ) box, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of sec., inside a period of 24 hours, when the received power is lower than the RLT1 threshold level - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−

into the Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the received power is lower than the RLT2, RLT3, RLT4 threshold levels over which the system activates the relevant alarms. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlts 1 card.

−


•

Rlt. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the received power. With details: −

the Rlt 1 dBm cursor, points out the first threshold level of the received power. To change the parameters move the cursor over the desired value. Choosing the Default push-button, it is possible to restore the standard value.

−

the Rlt 2..., Rlt 3..., Rlt 4... cursors, respectively point out the second, the third and the fourth threshold level of the received power. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Rlt 1 card.


TxPwr Radio The selection of the TxPwr Radio… option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the TxPwr Radio… window. Warning. The TxPwr Radio option is available into the equipment with 1+0 configuration. While the TxPwr Radio 1 and TxPwr Radio 2 options into the equipment with 1+1 configuration. The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the RxPwr Radio measurement (refer to Figure 21).


123

The commands present into the TxPwr Radio… window allows executing the following operations: •

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and d isplayed into the window.

•


•


•


106

Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the above listed parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dBm. With details, if into the menu bar it is present the Seconds push-button, the system displays into the figure the Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts4 control parameters. If it is present the Powers push-button, the system displays the TMMax, TMMin parameters. •

to set the thresholds of some control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms

•



To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired TxPwr Radio... measurement. The system displays the TxPwr Radio… window. 5. Select the arrow placed on the side of the push-button and choose from the list: •

the Seconds, option to display the results of the TLTS1, TLTS2, TLTS3, TLTS4 parameters.

•

the Powers, option to display the results of the TMMax, TMMin parameters.

To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired RadioPDH-AL equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired TxPwr Radio... measurement. The system displays the TxPwr Radio… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. The system displays the Tx Pwr Common window that contains the following cards: •

15 M Tlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Tlts.... alarms. With details: −

124

into the Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the transmitted power is lower than the TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the r elevant alarms.


To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value. −


•

24 H Tlts. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of 24 H Tlts.... alarms. With details: −

into the Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area ) boxes, the system points out the threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

−


•

Tlt. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the transmitted power. With details: −

the Tlt 1 dBm cursor, points out the first threshold level of the transmitted power. To change the parameters move the cursor over the desired value. Choosing the Default push-button, it is possible to restore the standard value.

−

the Tlt 2..., Tlt 3..., Tlt 4... cursors, respectively point out the second, the third and the fourth threshold level of the transmitted power. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out for the Tlt 1 card.


5.5.8.4 PM Measurements for the ADM-C equipment

The ADM-C equipment, realized by Siae Microelettronica, support the following PM (Performance Monitoring) measurements:

•

G826SMstB2M1 West. This measurement checks the quality of the signal received by the west aggregate. The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T: −


−


−


Warning. The B2 and M1 bytes are used, for the measurement of the parameters only if the following alarms HAVE NOT BEEN activated: Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame, B2 Excessive Ber, J0 Path Trace Mismatch, Ms Ais.

•

G826SMstB2M1 East. This measurement checks the quality of the signal received by the east aggregate. Warning. The measurement is available only for the equipment with Terminal 1+1 or Drop Insert configuration.


125

The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T: −

Byte B2 ............BBE, ES, SES, UAS

−

Byte M1............ BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE

−


Warning. The B2 and M1 bytes are used, for the measurement of the parameters only if the following alarms HAVE NOT BEEN activated: Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame, B2 Excessive Ber, J0 Path Trace Mismatch, Ms Ais.

•

G826SRstB1 West. This measurement checks the quality of the signal received by the west aggregate. The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OOFS quality parameters, specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T.

•

G826SRstB1 East. This measurement checks the quality of the signal received by the east aggregate. Warning. The measurement is available only for the equipment with Terminal 1+1 or Drop Insert configuration. The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OOFS quality parameters specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T.

•

G826Vc12Path x. This measurement checks the quality of the received signal on the VC12 corresponding to the selected tributary. Warning. Into the measure name the x letter points out the number of the tributary (1 ÷ 21). The check consists of measuring the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI, BBE, BBE FE quality parameters specified into the Recommendation G.826 of the ITU-T. Warning. If the equipment is provided with the Tributary 42x2 expansion, the following PM measurement will be available: G826Vc12Path 1 ÷ G826Vc12Path 63.


•


•

BBE FE (Background Block Errors Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.

•


•

ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote blocks.

•

OOFS (Out of Frame Seconds). The second that do not belong to UAS but with the Out OF Frame Alarm activated.

•

•

•


SES (Severely Errored Seconds). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks ≥ N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, J0 Path Trace Mismatch Alarm, Ms Ais Alarm). SES FE (Severely Errored Seconds Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks ≥ N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm). UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds.

107


126


The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured. •

UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.

•

UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.

G826SMstB2M1 West The selection of the G826SMstB2M1 West option, present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the window shown in Figure 22. The commands present into the G826SMstB2M1 West window, allows executing the following operations: •


•


108


•


.

•


•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Warning. The change of a threshold, automatically changes the value of the same threshold for the parameters/alarms of the G826SMstB2M1_East measurement.

•


108




127

Figure 22

Notes of in Figure 22 (1)

Warning. It is possible that the system does not points out this parameter because the relevant value is not available into the MIB (Management Information Base) loaded on the equipment under examination.

(2)


(3)

The wording:

(4)

•


•




•


•

•

128


Stop/Start menu, allows deactivating (Stop push-button ) or activating again (Start push-button ) the measurement. PM Config menu, opens the G826 SMst B2 M1 Common window. Into such a window, the operator can set the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.


•

•

(5)

Table View/Chart View menu, points out the displaying type of the results and it allows changing it. With details: −


−




−

the Blocks label, points out that into the figure there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring unit.



•

24 H ... boxes, point out the threshold exceeding of the relevant control parameters into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) p resent into the window.

•



(6)

−


−


−


−


−


−


Into this area, the system displays, by means of a graphical (as shown in figure) or a table format, the results of the daily and primary records relevant to the measurement to which the window refers. The detailed description of the contents relevant to this area is reported in following Figure 23. Warning. For each measurement, the system provides as available the current records, the last 16 primary records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily record (corresponding to the previous day).


129

Figure 23

130





•


•


•




•

•

ML - Meaningless (green). It points out that the record has been completely acquired and the measurement is not affected by errors. MF - Meaningful (green). It points out that the record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. IN - Incomplete (yellow). It points out that the record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measurement starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. Warning. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 o f each day.

•


•





•


•


•


The Type column, points out the control parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. The listed parameters changes according to the measurement type.


131

To reset the values of the records (daily and pr imary) 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired ADM-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the Clear Counters push-button and confirm. The values displayed into the graphical diagram or into the table (according to the displaying format) are reset.

To execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired ADM-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the Clear Alarms push-button and confirm. All the activated alarm status boxes (15 M.... and/or 24 H....) are deactivated.

To activate the measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired ADM-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the Start push-button and confirm. The measurement is started-up.

To deactivate the measurement 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired ADM-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the Stop push-button and confirm. The measurement is stopped.

132


To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired ADM-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the arrow present on the side of the text box and choose from the list: •

•

the Seconds, option to display the results of the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE and UASBIDI parameters. the Blocks, option to display the results of the BBE, BBE FE parameters.

To change the data d isplaying format 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired ADM-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. To change the data displaying format from: •


•


To set the thresholds 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired ADM-C equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Performances command. The system displays the Performances window. 4. Select the desired G826… measurement. The system displays the G826… window. 5. Select the PM Config push-button. The system displays the G826 SMst B2 M1 Common window that contains the following cards: •

General. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold levels of the UAS, UAS FE, SES, and SES FE parameters. With details into: −

The N Ses Set UAS (P) box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES (or SES FE) - over which starts the UAS (or UAS F E) unavailability period. To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 10 sec.

−

The N Ses Reset UAS (Q) box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES (or SES FE) - over which ends the UAS (or UAS FE) unavailability period. To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 10 sec.


133

−

The N BBE Set Ses box, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES (or a SES FE). To change the value, type into the box a number comprised between 1 and 100 %.

•



−


•

15 M Es FE. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Es FE alarm. With details: −

into the 15 M Es FE Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 15 M Es FE Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES FE has occurred over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•



−


•

15 M Ses FE. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 15 M Ses FE alarm. With details: −

into the 15 M Ses FE Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 15 M Ses FE Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 900. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•



−

134

into the 24 H Es Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm.


To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value. •

24 H Es FE. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Es FE alarm. With details: −

into the 24 H Es FE Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 24 H Es FE Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•



−


•

24 H Ses FE. Into this card, it is possible to set the threshold level and the seriousness of the 24 H Ses FE alarm. With details: −

into the 24 H Ses FE Alarm Severity area, it is pointed out the seriousness coupled with the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

−

into the 24 H Ses FE Threshold area, it is pointed out the threshold level expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the relevant alarm. To change the value, type, into the box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold. Choosing the Reset push-button, it is possible to reset the value.

•


•

UAS FE. Into this card, it is possible to check and to set out the seriousness coupled with the UAS FE alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button into the UAS FE Alarm Severity area.

•

UASBIDI. Into this card, it is possible to check and to set out the seriousness coupled with the UASBIDI alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button into the UASBidi Alarm Severity area..



135

G826SMstB2M1 East The selection of the G826SMstB2M1 East option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the G826SMstB2M1 East window. Warning. The measurement is available only for the equipment with Terminal 1+1 or Drop Insert configuration.

The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G826SMstB2M1 West measurement (refer to Figure 22).

The commands present into the G826SMstB2M1 East window, allows executing the following operations: •

•

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and d isplayed into the window. to execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding 95 Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS, UAS FE, UASBIDI alarms. 96

•


.

•


•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Warning. The change of a threshold, automatically changes the value of the same threshold for the parameters/alarms of the G826SMstB2M1 West measurement.

•


The procedures to execute G826SMstB2M1 West .

every

operation

are

the

same

ones

reported

at

paragraph

G826SRstB1 West The selection of the G826SRstB1 West option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the G826SRstB1 West window.


The commands present into the G826SRstB1 West window allows executing the following operations: •

•


136


96

•


•

to change the type of the displayed control parameters Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. With details, if into the menu bar it is present the Seconds push-button, the system displays into the figure the ES, SES, UAS, OOFS control parameters. If it is present the Blocks push-button, the system displays the BBE parameter.

•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Into the procedure, at the choice of the PM Config command, the system displays the G826SRst B1 Common window. Into such a window there are the following cards: General, 15 M Es, 15 M Ses, 24 H Es, 24 h Ses and UAS. Warning. The change of a threshold, automatically changes the value of the same threshold for the parameters/alarms of the G826SRstB1 East measurement.

•



every

operation

are

the

same

ones

reported

at

paragraph

G826SRstB1 East The selection of the G826SRstB1 East option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the G826SRstB1 East window. Warning. The measurement is available only for the equipment with Terminal 1+1 or Drop Insert configuration.


The commands present into the G826SRstB1 East window allows executing the following operations: •

•

to reset the values of the control parameters relevant to all the records (daily and primary) stored into the equipment and displayed into the window. to execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding

95

Warning. The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS alarm. 96

•


.

•

to change the type of the displayed control parameters Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. With details, if into the menu bar it is present the Seconds push-button, the system displays into the figure the ES, SES, UAS, OOFS control parameters. If it is present the Blocks push-button, the system displays the BBE parameter.

•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Into the procedure, at the choice of the PM Config command, the system displays the G826SRst B1 Common window. Into such a window there are the following cards: General, 15 M Es, 15 M Ses, 24 H Es, 24 h Ses and UAS.


137

Warning. The change of a threshold, automatically changes the value of the same threshold for the parameters/alarms of the G826SRstB1 West measurement. •



every

operation

are

the

same

ones

reported

at

paragraph

G826Vc12Path x The selection of the G826Vc12Path x option present into the Performances window, and the next selection of the Show command opens the G826Vc12Path x window. Warning. Into the measure name the x letter points out the number of the tributary (1 ÷ 21).

The displaying mode of the results relevant to the measurement and the use of the elements into the window, is the same one described for the G826SMstB2M1 West measurement (refer to Figure 22). Warning. If the equipment is provided with the Tributary 42x2 expansion, the following PM measurement will be available: G826Vc12Path 1 ÷ G826Vc12Path 63.

The commands present into the G826Vc12Path x window allows executing the following operations: •

•


•


•

to change the type of the displayed control parameters Into the same window, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. With details, if into the menu bar it is present the Seconds push-button, the system displays into the figure the ES, SES, UAS, ESFE, SESFE, UASFE, UASBIDI control parameters. If it is present the Blocks push-button, the system displays the BBE and BBEFE parameters.

•

to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms Into the procedure, at the choice of the PM Config command, the system displays the G826SRst B1 Common window. Into such a window there are the following cards: General, 15 M Es, 15 M Es FE, 15 M Ses, 15 M Ses FE, 24 H Es, 24 H Es FE, 24 H Ses, 24 H Ses FE , UAS, UAS FE and UAS Bidi .

•



138

every

operation

are

the

same

ones

reported

at

paragraph


5.5.9

Equipment - Units




The Units command allows checking the type, the siae code, the version and the functioning status of the units that compose the equipment hardware (real configuration). Then, each equipment is provided with a “foreseen” configuration stored into the controller. The choice of the command opens the Units of ... window shown in Figure 24. Warning. It is possible to open more Units of... windows relevant to different equipment.

If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the commands present into the Units of… window, it is possible to change the “foreseen” configuration. Warning. For the PDH-AL radio equipment, it is not possible to modify the foreseen unit except for the service channels.

Figure 24


139



(2)


(3)

One record is devoted to each unit. Warning. The name and the number of the displayed units change according to the type of the selected unit.

(4)

The functional status of each unit is represented by the boxes present into the columns 1...5. The column number identifies the alarm type while the box colour points out the alarm status.

(5)

On the R.H. side, the system reports the key of the columns 1...5. One alarm corresponds to each number, with details: Alarm

Description

1 Unit Fail 2 Unit Missing

The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning The unit is not present into the equipment (Real Type Unequipped - column wording) also if it is foreseen (unit name – Expected Type column). The unit does not answer to the program interrogations The real unit (Real Type column) is different from the foreseen one (Expected Type column). The sw/fw version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual rel column) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Rel Bench 1 or Rel Bench 2 column).

3 Unit Not Responding 4 Unit Hardware Mismatch 5 Unit Software Mismatch

On the L.H. side, it is reported the key of the colours relevant to the boxes. The green colour points out that the alarm is deactivated. The remaining colours point out that the alarm is activated and then a different seriousness level is coupled to each colour as explained into the key. (6)

With details the column •

110

:

Real Type, contains the unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped points out that the unit is not physically present into the equipment.

•

Expected Type, contains the foreseen unit type. The foreseen configuration is set by the user and it is stored into the equipment. Warning. For the PDH-AL radio equipment, it is not possible to modify the foreseen unit except for the service channels. A misalignment between the really present unit and the foreseen one causes the presence of an alarm (Unit Hardware Mismatch) 111. The wording Unequipped points out that the unit is not foreseen.

110

The presence of the dots (...) into the filed points out that the wording is not completely displayed. To be able to see the entire wording, it is necessary to enlarge the column. 111

Warning. For the ADM-C and PDH-AL equipment, the names of the units pointed out into the Real Type and Expected Type columns could be different and do not cause alarm. This situation is present for the units of the same type with different specifications. For instance, in the case of the tributary extensions (ADM-C equipment), the Tributary 42x2 75 Ω type groups the Tributary 42x2 Coax (75 Ω ), Tributary 42x2 subD15 (75 Ω ), units etc. For such units, into the Expected type column , the system will point out the mane of the type: Tributary 42x2 75 Ω ,, while into the Real Type column, it will point out the mane of the unit present into the equipment: for instance, Tributary 42x2 Coax (75 Ω ).

140


•

HW ver., points out the unit version.

•

Part Num., points out the Part Number of the unit.

•

Parent Part Num, points out the Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced. Warning. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.

•

Serial Num., points out the Series Number of the gr oup that contains the unit. Warning. If the unit is not contained into a group (Parent Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.

To change the foreseen unit Warning. For the PDH-AL radio equipment, it is not possible to modify the foreseen unit except for the service channels. 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Units command. The system displays the Units window. 4. Select the line relevant to the unit to be changed. 5. Choose the Unit Setup menu. The system opens the Units Setup dialogue window. Into the Real Type field, the system points out the unit present into the equipment (such a unit is pointed out into the Real Type column ). Into the Expected Type field, the system points out the foreseen unit (such a unit is pointed out into the Expected Type column ). 6. Select the arrow on the side of the Expected Type field and select from the list the new type of the foreseen unit. Warning. The choice of the Unequipped option points out that it is not foreseen any unit. 7. Choose Apply and then confirm. The new value is pointed out into the Expected Type box of the Units of… window.

5.5.10 Equipment - Diagnosis Equipment status User Profile


The Diagnosis command runs the homonymous program which, analysing the active alarms of the selected equipment, returns the possible causes that have triggered the alarms themselves (more info). Warning. The alarm diagnostics functionality is available only for US (SDH), EL (PDH), AL (PDH) radio equipment.

The choice of the command opens the window shown in Figure 25. Warning. It is possible to open more Diagnosis windows relevant to different equipment.


141

Figure 25 Figure 25 notes (1)


(2)

The operations executed during the diagnostics are pointed out in blue color, while the possible causes in black/bold and are preceded by the Diagnosis message: PROBABLE CAUSE: .... wording

To start the alarm diagnostics program of an equipment 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment - Diagnosis command. The system displays the Diagnosis window. 4. Select the Run push-button. The diagnostics procedure starts. The Diagnosis complete wording (refer to Figure 25) points out that the operator diagnosis is ended.

142


Diagnosis application (more info) The Diagnosis application is an alarm correlator. Warning. This application is a SCT/LMT option and it doesn't require any reserved software on the equipment. The active alarms on the equipment are used as input events of a state diagram describing the equipment behaviour, each event causes a state transition, the end state provides to the operator the indication of the root-cause for the fault. The state diagram used by the application is according to: equipment type and equipment configuration (1+0, 1+1 Hot Standby, etc.) The general rules implemented by the application are the following ones: •

The following alarms (common to all radio equipment type) are considered primary fault condition: PSU (Power Supply Fault) fail, Modulator Fail, Radio Unit Fail, IDU-ODU Cable open and Cable short, Transmitter power low, Tributary Loss of Signal, User Input Alarm.

•

The alarm correlation is mainly done on the alarm concerning the received signal according to the following rules: −

In 1+1 Hot Standby configuration the alarm presence on both radio branches is considered caused by a propagation problem or by a fault on the remote transmitter.

−

In 1+0 and 1+1 Frequency Diversity and 1+1 Hot Standby (alarm condition on only one radio branch) configuration the application uses the radio loop commands to identify the fault cause. The user is asked to authorize the loop commands (Traffic affecting operation). The following procedure is done applying the loops (refer to Figure 26): •

RF Loop command and test on Low BER alarm. If the alarm disappears, the fault cause is assigned to a propagation problem or to a remote transmitter fail. Otherwise go to step b.

•

IDU loop command and test on Low BER alarm. If the alarm disappears, the fault cause is assigned to local RT failure. Otherwise go to step c.

•

Base Band loop command and test on Low BER alarm. If the alarm disappears, the fault cause is assigned to local RIM failure. Otherwise the fault cause is assigned to local LIM failure.

Figure 26 Example When Diagnosis application checks an alarm condition on the received signal and the radio configuration is the following one: 1+0 or 1+1 Hot Standby with only one alarmed radio branch. It uses the radio loops to find the fault unit. The operator is asked to authorize the use of loop commands and the user profile must allow loop commands as shown in the following window.


143

The following conditions can be checked: −

The RF loop removes LBER alarm Reading current alarms…. Run diagnosis…. ---RFLoop Branch-1 PROBABLE CAUSE: Remote Tx fail or Propagation problem Diagnosis Complete

−

The IDU loop removes the LBER Alarm Reading current alarms…. Run diagnosis…. ---RFLoop Branch-1 ---LoopIdu Branch-1 PROBABLE CAUSE: Receiver 1 Fail Diagnosis Complete

−

The Base Band loop removes the LBER Alarm Reading current alarms…. Run diagnosis…. ---RFLoop Branch-1 ---LoopIdu Branch-1 ---Loop Base Band Branch-1 PROBABLE CAUSE: RIM 1 Fail Diagnosis Complete

−

The Base Band loop doesn't remove the LBER Alarm Reading current alarms…. Run diagnosis…. ---RFLoop Branch-1 ---LoopIdu Branch-1 ---Loop Base Band Branch-1 PROBABLE CAUSE: LIM Fail Diagnosis Complete

5.5.11 Equipment - Communication Setup

At the choice of Communication Setup option, the program displays the following options: •

Routing Table. This option allows to display and modify the setting of the static routing table and the default gateway address currently used by the selected equipment (routing table and default gateway “Running”).

•

Stored Routing Table This option allows to display and modify the setting of the static routing table and the default gateway address memorized into the selected equipment (routing table and default gateway “Stored”).

•

Port Configuration. This option allows to display and modify the settings relevant to the communication ports available for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal.

•

OSPF. This option allows to display and modify the configuration parameter of the OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) routing dynamic protocol. Warning. The OSPF option is not available if the equipment firmware does not support the OSPF functionality.

144


5.5.11.1 Equipment - Communication Setup - Routing Table Equipment status User profile



The Routing Table command allows checking the setting of the static routing table and the default gateway address currently used by the selected equipment (“Running” routing table and default gateway).

The function of the “routing table” is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other one. Warning. The “Running” routing table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the elements present into the “Stored” routing table, at every equipment start-up.

The system forwards to the equipment with the default “gateway” function the data that have a receiver unreachable through the routes present into the r outing table.

Warning. When all the equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the routing table and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner traffic. The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belong to different networks, then, the traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other o ne.

The choice of this command opens the window shown in Figure 27. If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the push-buttons present into the Routing Table window, it is possible: •

to add an element to the routing table Each Siae equipment at its initialisation (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements of the routing table that identify the supervisory ports 112 of the equipment. These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port 113. If it is necessary, the SCT/LMT user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones. The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used routing table (“Running” routing table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller (“Stored” routing table); the system does not record the elements (automatically set) into the backup memory of the controller because they are newly set at every equipment start-up.

•

to remove an element from the routing table Warning. The removal of an element (automatically set) causes and automatic new insertion of the element itself at the next equipment start-up.

•

to reset the “Stored” ro uting table

•

to set or modify the IP address used as default gateway

•

to delete the IP address used as default gateway

112

Communication ports provided with the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal.

113

Warning. If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it into the equipment routing table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements of the routing table are set at the equipment start-up.


145

Figure 27

Notes of Figure 27

146

(1)


(2)


(3)

The wording: −

Lan, identifies the communication port with the LAN network.

−

Lan/OSI, identifies the inner communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.

−

Lct , identifies the port for the connection with the PC over which it is present the SCT/LMT application program.

−

RS232, identifies the serial port for the connection with other network elements.

−

Radio, identifies the communication port (radio side) represented by the radio signal (communication port pr esent into the radio equipment: PDH, SDH).


(4)

−

2Mb/s, identifies the E1 communication port (2Mb/s) (communication port present into the PMP equipment).

−

Agg. West , identifies the communication port represented by the West side aggregate signal (communication port present into the ADM-C equipment).

−

Agg. East , identifies the communication port represented by the East side aggregate signal (communication port present into the ADM-C equipment).

−

RS232/2Mb, identifies the communication port RS232 or 2Mbps (at user’s choice) for the connection with other network elements (communication port present into the PDH-AL equipment).

The wording: −

−

LOCAL, points out that the element has been automatically inserted by the controller. The element identifies the network and/or the interface directly connected with the equipment. NETMGMT, points out that the element has been manually inserted by the user (static element).

−

OSPF , points out that the element has been automatically inserted by the OSPF protocol (dynamic element).

−

OTHER, point out all the other situations that are not comprised into one of the previous cases 114.

To add an element to the routing table 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Routing Table command. The system displays the Routing Table window. 4. Choose the Add push-button. The system displays the Routing Table Params window. 5. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.). For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 6. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the network address definition of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.). For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 7. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the next router equipment. For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 8. Into the Interface box, set the supervisory port that corresponds to the IP address of the router equipment. Select the arrow placed o n the side of the box and choose the desired value from the list. The available values change according to the selected equipment type. Select the wording Not selected , when the system has automatically to insert the parameter according to the IP address of the router. 9. Choose the Ok push-button. The new element is inserted into the table. Warning. The system records the new element into the currently used routing table (“Running” routing table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (“Stored” routing table).

114

Warning. This label generally does not shown. It has been anticipated for future uses.


147

To remove an element from the routing table 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Routing Table command. The system displays the Routing Table window. 4. Select the element of the routing table. 5. Choose the Remove push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 6. Press Yes. The element is removed by the table. Warning. The system deletes the element into the currently used routing table (“Running” routing table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (“Stored” routing table).

To reset the “Stored” routing table 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Routing Table command. The system displays the Routing Table window. 4. Select the Reset push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 5. Choose the Confirm changes ? push-button. Warning. The system does not remove the elements into the currently used r outing table (“Running” routing table) but only into the backup memory of the equipment (“Stored” routing table). The system will refresh the “Running” routing table at the first equipment restarting procedure.

To set or modify the IP Address used as default gateway 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Routing Table command. The system displays the Routing Table window. 4. Into the Default Gateway area, type, into each one of the four available spaces (subdivided by a dot), a number comprised b etween 0 and 255. 5. Into the Default Gateway area, set the supervisory port that corresponds to the IP address of the gateway equipment. Select the arrow placed on the side of the box and choose the desired value from the list. The available values change according to the selected equipment type. Select the wording Not selected , when the system has automatically to insert the parameter according to the IP address of the router.

148


6. Choose the Apply push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 7. Press Yes. Warning. The system inserts the new default gateway IP address into the currently used routing table (“Running” routing table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (“Stored” routing table).

Warning. The insertion of a new IP address used as default gateway can fail due to one of the two following causes: −

the new IP address do es not belong to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface;

−

an IP address of default gateway, previously inserted, already exists in the Stored Routing Table (“Stored” routing table).

To delete the IP Address used as default gateway 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Routing Table command. The system displays the Routing Table window. 4. Choose the Delete push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 5. Press Yes. Warning. The system deletes the default gateway IP address into the currently used routing table (“Running” routing table) and into the backup memory o f the equipment (“Stored” routing table).

5.5.11.2 Equipment - Communication Setup - Stored Routing Table Equipment status User profile

Connected/Login System

The Stored Routing Table command allows checking the setting of the static routing table 115 and the default gateway address 116 present into the backup memory of the equipment controller (“Stored” routing table and default gateway).

115

The function of the “routing table” is the one to control the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged among the elements (PC’s, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from a network to another one. 116

The system forwards to the default gateway the data that have a receiver unreachable through the routes present into the table.


149

Warning. The equipment does not currently use the “Stored” routing table. Such a table becomes an operative one at the equipment restarting. In fact, in such a case, the system inserts the elements of the “Stored” routing table into the ro uting table used by the equipment (“Running” routing table). The setting of the “Stored” routing table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an address of the equipment supervisory ports. In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used routing table (“Running” routing table). The changes have to be inserted into the “Stored” routing table. At the next equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the “Stored” routing table into the routing table used by the equipment.

The command selection opens the Stored Routing Table window displayed in Figure 28. If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, through the push-buttons present into the Stored Routing Table window, it is possible: •

to add elements to the “Stored” routing table of the equipment The system records every new element into the backup memory of the equipment controller (“Stored” routing table); at the equipment start-up, the system will automatically insert the elements present into the “Stored” routing table into the routing table used by the equipment (“Running” routing table).

•

to remove elements from the “Stored” routing table of the equipment

•

to remove all the elements from the “Stored” routing table

•

to set or to change the IP address used as default gateway into the “Stored” routing table

•

to delete the IP address used as d efault gateway into the “Stored” routing table

Figure 28

150



If it has not been set any identification code, the system points out the IP address (agent SNMP) of the equipment.

(2)

The system points out also the version of the MIB (Management Information Base), when the relevant value is available into the MIB loaded on the equipment under examination.

(3)

The selection of the Refresh push-button reads again the data from the memory of the equipment after a Retrieve command 117.

(4)

The selection of the push-button: •

Reset, deletes the elements of the “Stored” routing table. The selection of the push-button has to be confirmed.

•

Retrieve, reads again the data from the backup memory and loads them into the equipment memory 117.

•

Save, saves the elements of the table into the backup memory of the equipment. The selection of the push-button has to be confirmed.

(5)

The wording: −


−

Lan/OSI, identifies the inner communication port that interfaces itself with the OSI router.

−

Lct , identifies the communication port for the connection with the PC over which it is present the SCT/LMT application program.

−


−

Radio, identifies the communication port (radio side) represented by the radio signal (communication port present into the radio equipment: PDH, SDH).

−

2Mb/s, identifies the E1 communication port (2Mb/s) (communication port present into the PMP equipment).

−

Agg. West , identifies the communication port represented by the West side aggregate signal (communication port present into the ADM-C equipment).

−

Agg. East , identifies the communication port represented by the East side aggregate signal (communication port present into the ADM-C equipment).

−

RS232/2Mb, identifies the communication port RS232 or 2Mbps (at user’s choice) for the connection with other network elements (communication port present into the PDH-AL equipment).

To add an element into the “Stored” routing table 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Stored Routing Table command. The system displays the Stored Routing Table window. 4. Select the Add push-button. The system displays the Add New Entry window.

117

For instance, if the user wants updating the “stored” routing table displaying the elements manually added by the user into the “running” routing table, he has to select the Retrieve pushbutton and later the Refresh one.


151

5. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.). For each one of the four available spaces (subdivided by a point), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 6. Into the Net Mask box, type the mask for the definition of the network address relevant to the destination element (equipment, network, etc.). For each one of the four available spaces (subdivided by a point), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 7. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment that acts as router for the destination network. For each one of the four available spaces (subdivided by a point), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 8. Into the Interface box, set the supervisory port that corresponds to the IP address of the router equipment. Select the arrow placed on the side of the box and choose the desired value from the list. Select the wording Not selected , when the system has automatically to insert the parameter according to the IP address of the router. 9. Select the Ok push-button. The system inserts the new element into the table. 10. Select the Save push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 11. Press Yes. The system saves the new element into the backup memory of the equipment. Warning. The system records the new element ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (“Stored” routing table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will insert such a new element also into the current routing (“Running” routing table).

To remove an element from the “Stored” routing table 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Stored Routing Table command. The system displays the Stored Routing Table window. 4. Select the element into the routing table. 5. Select the Remove push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 6. Press Yes. The system removes the element from the table. 7. Select the Save push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 8. Press Yes. The system removes the element from the backup memory of the equipment. Warning. The system deletes the element ONLY from the backup memory of the equipment (“Stored” routing table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will delete such an element also into the current routing table (“Running” routing table).

152


To remove all the elements present into the “Stored” routing table 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Stored Routing Table command. The system displays the Stored Routing Table window. 4. Select the Reset push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 5. Press the Yes push-button. The system deletes all the elements from the backup memory of the equipment.

To set or to change the IP Address used as default gateway into the “Stored” routing table 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Stored Routing Table command. The system displays the Stored Routing Table window. 4. Into the Default Gateway area, type, into each one of the four available spaces (divided by a point), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 5. Into the Default Gateway area, set the supervisory port that corresponds to the IP address of the gateway equipment. Select the arrow placed on the side of the box and choose the desired value from the list. Select the wording Not selected , when the system has automatically to insert the parameter according to the IP address of the router. 6. Select the Apply push-button placed on the side of the box. The system displays a confirmation window. 7. Press Yes. 8. Select the Save push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 9. Press Yes. The system saves the new IP address of default gateway into the backup memory of the equipment.

Warning. The system records the IP address of default gateway ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (“Stored” routing table). The equipment will display such an IP address only at the next restart procedure of the equipment itself and the system will insert it also into the current routing table (“Running” routing table).


153

To delete the IP address used as default gateway 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Stored Routing Table command. The system displays the Stored Routing Table window. 4. Select the Delete push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 5. Press Yes. 6. Select the Save push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 7. Press Yes. The system removes the IP address of default gateway from the backup memory of the equipment.

5.5.11.3 Equipment - Communication Setup - Port Configuration Equipment status User profile



The Port Configuration command allows checking the settings of the communication ports available for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal. The choice of the command opens the window shown in Figure 29. Warning. It is possible to open more Configuration Port windows relevant to different equipment.

If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the push-buttons present into the Configuration Port window, it is possible:

154

•

to change the settings of the communication ports

•

to execute the software reset of the equipment

•

to reset the routing table “Stored”


Figure 29


The card: Warning. According to the selected equipment type, it will be displayed/available only the cards relevant to the communication ports supported by the equipment. •

IP Ethernet, Ethernet, displays the address and the parameters of the communication port with the LAN network (TCP/IP protocol).

•

PPP RS-232, RS-232, displays the address and the parameters of the serial port for the connection with other network elements (TCP/IP and PPP protocols).

•

PPP RS232/2Mbps, RS232/2Mbps, displays the address and the parameters of the RS232 or 2Mbps communication port (at user’s choice) for the connection with other network elements (TCP/IP and PPP protocols). Warning. The system displays the PPP RS232/2Mbps card as an alternative element with respect to the PPP RS-232 card, if it has been selected a PDH-AL radio equipment.

•

IP Over OSI, OSI , (TCP/IP and OSI protocols) displays: −

the IP address of the inner por t for the interfacing with the OSI router;

−

the parameters of the DCC channel (Data Communication Channel) relevant Channel) relevant to the STM1 signal (line side and radio side);

−

the GOSIP address of the equipment;

−

the routing level of the OSI router.

Warning. The system displays the IP Over OSI card only if it has been selected an equipment managed with the OSI protocol. •

LCT PPP, PPP, displays the address and the parameters of the communication port with the PC on which it is installed the SCT/LMT program (TCP/IP and PPP p rotocols).


155

Warning. For the PDH Radio type equipment, the address and the configuration parameters of the port for the connection with the PC (over which the SCT/LMT program is currently running) have to be set into the “PPP-RS232” card, because the “LCT PPP” card for this specific specific equipment equipment type is not available. available. •

PPP Radio, Radio, displays the address and the parameters of the communication port (radio side) represented by the radio signal (TCP/IP and PPP protocols). Warning. The system displays the PPP Radio card only if it has been selected a radio equipment (SDH, PDH).

•

PPP-E1 (2Mb/s), (2Mb/s), displays the address and the parameters of the E1 (2Mb/s) communication communication ports (TCP/IP protocols). Warning. The system displays the PPP-E1 card (2Mb/s) only if it has been selected a PMP type equipment. The communication parameters refer to the E1 communication ports (2Mb/s) of the Proxy equipment (or IP Box) 118.

•

Agg. West, West, displays the address and the parameters of the communication port represented by the west side aggregate signal (TCP/IP and PPP protocols). Warning. The system displays the Agg. the Agg. West card card only if it has been selected a ADM-C equipment.

•

Agg. East, East, displays the address and the parameters of the communication port represented by the east side aggregate signal (TCP/IP and PPP protocols). Warning. The system displays the Agg. the Agg. East card card only if it has been selected a ADM-C equipment.

(2)


(3)


(4)


Set Values push-button, communicates communicates the new set values to the equipment. The push-button choice has to be confirmed.

•

Restart push-button, Restart push-button, executing a software reset of the equipment. The push-button choice has to be confirmed.

•

Store push-button, Store push-button, stores the values into the equipment controller. The push-button choice has to be confirmed.

•

Retrieve push-button, Retrieve push-button, reads again the values set into the equipment controller.

•

Refresh push-button, Refresh push-button, sets again the values pointed out at the window opening.

•

Reset push-button, Reset push-button, it removes the elements of the routing table memorized into the equipment controller (routing table “Stored”). The push-button choice has to be confirmed.

To change the parameters relevant to a communication port 1. Into the Station List area area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Port Configuration command. command. The system displays the Configuration Port window. window. 4. Bring at front the card relevant relevant to the desired port. 5. Set the parameters parameters relevant relevant to the selected card: •

IP Ethernet

118

The Proxy is an equipment developed by Siae Microelettronica to connect, through TCP/IP protocol, the master station to a supervisory system/program (for instance SCT/LMT, NMS5UX). In “stand alone” configuration, configuration, the equipment equipment (called IP Box) Box) executes the the IP router function. function.

156


•

PPP RS-232

•

PPP RS232/2Mbps

•

IP Over OSI

•

LCT PPP

•

PPP Radio

•

PPP-E1 (2Mb/s)

•

Agg. West

•

Agg. East

6. Choose the Set Values push-button Values push-button and then confirm. 7. Choose the Store push-button Store push-button and then confirm. 8. Choose the Restart push-button and then confirm.

“IP Ethernet” card •

IP Address Address box. IP address address (Internet Protocol), Protocol), of the communication port with the LAN network, of the equipment. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

•

IP NetMask box. It is the mask for the network address definition. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255.

“PPP RS-232” card •

IP PPP Address Address box. IP (Internet Protocol) Protocol) PPP (Point to Point Protocol) Protocol) address of the equipment serial port, for the connection with other network elements. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

•

IP PPP NetMask box. NetMask box. It is the mask for the network address. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255.

•

PPP Mode area. Functioning mode of the PPP protocol: as Client, as Client, as Server, or Server, or in Automatic in Automatic (the system configure itself as Client or or Server according according to the functioning mode of the PPP protocol relevant to the equipment placed on the other side of the connection). Then, in Automatic in Automatic mode, mode, the system automatically sets the IP PPP Address of Address of the equipment under examination plus 1 to the element (equipment, PC, etc.) placed at the other line end 119 . To change the parameter select the desired option push-button.

•

PPP Baud Rate area. Transmission rate of the port: 9600, 19200, 38400 or 57600 or 57600.. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button.

119

For instance, if at the equipment (to which it has been connected the SCT/LMT program) it has been assigned the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8, Address 10.10.10.8, the system will automatically set the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.9 to the equipment placed at the other line end.


157

“PPP RS232/2Mbps” card Warning. The system displays the PPP RS232/2Mbps card as an alternative element with respect to the PPP RS-232 card, if it has been selected a PDH-AL radio equipment. •

IP PPP Address Address box. IP (Internet Protocol) Protocol) PPP (Point to Point Protocol) Protocol) address of the equipment serial port, for the connection with other network elements. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

•

IP PPP NetMask box. NetMask box. It is the mask for the network address. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255.

•

PPP Mode area. Functioning mode of the PPP protocol: as Client, as Client, as Server, or Server, or in Automatic in Automatic (the system configure itself as Client or or Server according according to the functioning mode of the PPP protocol relevant to the equipment placed on the other side of the connection). Then, in Automatic in Automatic mode, mode, the system automatically sets the IP PPP Address of Address of the equipment under examination plus 1 to the element (equipment, PC, etc.) placed at the other line end 119 . To change the parameter select the desired option push-button.

•

Remote Access Type area. It allows detecting the interface type to be used for the port under examination. If the user selects the: −

RS232 push-button, RS232 push-button, the system uses the serial interface.

−

2Mb push-button, the system uses one or more 16Kbit channels of a time slot relevant to one of the 2Mb/s tributaries available for the equipment.

To change the parameter select the desired option push-button. •

PPP Baud Rate area. Transmission rate of the port: 9600, 19200, 38400 or 57600 or 57600.. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button. Warning. The subject parameter is available only if it has been selected the RS232 value RS232 value into the Remote Access Type area. Type area.

•

EOC area. Setting of the tributary/time slot/16Kbit used for the connection with the remote terminal. With details, into the: −

2Mbit Selector box, box, it is pointed out the number of the used tributary. The wording No 2Mb Used points points out that the system does not use any tributary. To change the parameter, select the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list.

−

Slot Selector box, it is pointed out the number of the used time slot. To change the parameter, select the arrows placed on the side of the box to set the desired value.

−

16kbit Map Map box, it is pointed out the used 16Kbit (boxes with green color). The 16Kbit with the boxes of grey color are not used. To change the parameter, select the desired boxes. At each selection, the box change its status, it switches from active (green color) to deactivated (grey color) and vice-versa.

Warning. The parameters of the EOC area area are available only if it has been selected the 2Mb value into the Remote Access Type area. Type area.

“IP Over OSI” card Warning. Here below, there is the description of all the parameters that can be displayed into the IP Over OSI card. card. The presence of such parameters depends on the type of the selected equipment 120.

120

For instance, the STM1… STM1… boxes will be present only if it has been selected a SDH equipment.

158


•

IP Address Address box. IP address (Internet address (Internet Protocol) of Protocol) of the inner port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI router. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

•

IP NetMask box. It is the mask for the inner network address definition. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255.

•

QECC Radio Side box. Side box. Setting of the LAP D (Link Access Procedures channel D) protocol D) protocol – radio side. The wording: −

Network, points Network, points out that the LAP D protocol is configured as Network side. side.

−

User, points User, points out that the LAP D protocol is configured as User side. side.

To change the parameter selects the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the value from the list. •

STM1 QECC Radio Side box. Side box. Setting of the DCC channel (Data Communication Channel) at Channel) at radio side of the STM1 signal. The wording: −

Disable, points Disable, points out that the DCC channel is disabled.

−

d1-d3 Network, points Network, points out that the system uses the bytes D1...D3 (192Kb/s) of the RSOH section (Regenerator Section OverHead) relevant OverHead) relevant to the STM1 signal and the LAP D protocol (Link Access Procedures channel D) is D) is configured as Network side. side.

−

d1-d3 User, points User, points out that the system uses the bytes D1...D3 of the RSOH section relevant to the STM1 signal and the LAP D protocol is configured as User side. side.

−

d4-d12 Network, points Network, points out that the system uses the bytes D4...D12 (576Kb/s) of the MSOH section (Multiplexer (Multiplexer Section OverHead) relevant OverHead) relevant to the STM1 signal and the LAP D protocol is configured as Network side. side.

−

d4-d12 User, User, points out that the system uses the bytes D4...D12 of the MSOH section relevant to the STM1 signal and the LAP D protocol is configured as User side. side.


STM1 QECC Line Side box. Setting of the DCC channel at line side of the STM1 signal. The description of the values and the setting mode of the parameter is the same one pointed out for the STM1 QECC Radio Side box. box.

•

STM1 QECC West box West box.. Setting of the DCC channel at west side of the aggregate signal. The description of the values and the setting mode of the parameter is the same one pointed out for the STM1 QECC Radio Side box. box.

•

STM1 QECC East box East box.. Setting of the DCC channel at east side of the aggregate signal. The description of the values and the setting mode of the parameter is the same one pointed out for the STM1 QECC Radio Side box. box.

•

STM1 QECC MTU Type box. box. Setting of the standard that defines the maximum length of the packets that are transiting on the QECC channel. The wording: −

Other, does Other, does not point out any specific standard. It is possible to set the desired value into the STM1 QECC MTU Length box. Length box. 121

−

Q.921, points Q.921, points out the Q.921 standard Q.921 standard

−

Siae (Default), points (Default), points out the Siae default standard

−

MARCONI Compatible, points Compatible, points out the Marconi compatible standard compatible standard

−

. 121

.

ALCATEL Compatible, Compatible, points out the Alcatel the Alcatel compatible compatible standard

121

.

121

.


STM1 QECC MTU Length box. box. Maximum length (expressed by byte) of the packets that are transiting on the QECC channel. If, into the STM1 QECC MTU Type box, Type box, it has been selected the value: −

Q.921, Q.921, Siae (Default), MARCONI Compatible or ALCATEL Compatible, the system displays the value that corresponds to the set standard.

121

The value that corresponds to the standard is pointed out into the STM1 QECC MTU Length box. Length box.


159

It is not possible to change the value. − •

Other , it is possible to type the desired value.

EOC Radio Side box. Setting of the LAP D protocol – radio side. The wording: −

Network, points out that the LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

−

User, points out that the LAP D protocol is configured as User side.


EOC 2Mbit Side box. Setting of the LAP D pr otocol – 2Mb/s side. The wording: −

Network, points out that the LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

−

User, points out that the LAP D protocol is configured as User side.


EOC area. Setting of the tributary/time slot/16Kbit used for the connection with the remote terminal. With details, into the: −

2Mbit Selector box, it is pointed out the number of the used tributary. The wording No 2Mb Used points out that the system does not use any tributary. To change the parameter, select the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list.

−

Slot Selector box, it is pointed out the number of the used time slot. To change the parameter, select the arrows placed on the side of the box to set the desired value.

−

16kbit Map box, it is pointed out the used 16Kbit (boxes with green color). The 16Kbit with the boxes of grey color are not used. To change the parameter, select the desired boxes. At each selection, the box change its status, it switches from active (green color) to deactivated (grey color) and vice-versa.

•

Routing area. In this area, it is pointed out the routing level of the OSI router: −

L1, intra domain (inside the domain)

−

L2, extra domain (outside the domain).

To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button. •

Gosip Address area. Into the text box, it is pointed out the System ID part of the GOSIP address (Government OSI Profile). The GOSIP Address, according to the GOSIP V2, is composed by two IDP (Initial Domain Part) and DSP(Domain Specific Part) parts. Each part is composed by parameters. The values of these parameters, represented by one or more bytes, can be changed (System ID, AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved, Domain, Area). Each byte is represented by two characters that are the hexadecimal value of the two nibbles of the byte as pointed out here below. Table 2

Part

IDP

DSP

160

Parameter

Number of bytes

Default value

Changeable by the user

AFI (Authority and Format Identifier)

1

39

Yes

IDI (Initial Domain Identifier)

2

Country Code

Yes

Ver (Version)

1

82

Yes

Auth (Authority)

3

-

Yes

Reserved

2

0

Yes

Domain (Routing Domain)

2

-

Yes

Area

2

-

Yes

System ID (identification code of Network Element)

6

-

Yes

Sel (Selector)

1

1D

No


To change the part of System ID of the Gosip Address a. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. b. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment managed with OSI protocol. c. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Port Configuration command. The system displays the Configuration Port window. d. Bring at front the IP Over OSI card. e. Press the Settings... push-button The system opens the Equipment Properties window. f.

Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose System ID and press OK.

g. Selecting the Set as MAC Address push-button, it is possible to set, into the System ID boxes, the physical address of the equipment called MAC (Media Access Control) Address.

To check and/or to change the default part of the Gosip Address a. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. b. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment managed with OSI protocol. c. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Port Configuration command. The system displays the Configuration Port window. d. Bring at front the IP Over OSI card. e. Press the Setup Default... push-button The system opens the Gosip Default Option window. f.

To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type into the relevant boxes the value of the cor responding byte/s.

g. To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. h. To add a value to the list: −

Press the Add push-button. The system opens the Domain Settings window.

i.

j.

−

Type into the Label box, a name for the domain under examination.

−

Type into the Hex value boxes, the value of the bytes that represent the domain.

−

Press OK

To delete a value to the list: −

Select the value

−

Press the Remove push-button.

To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list.

k. To add or to delete a value to the list execute the same procedures pointed out for the Domain parameter. l.

Press OK.

“LCT PPP” card •

IP PPP Address box. IP (Internet Protocol) PPP (Point to Point Protocol) address of the port for the connection with the PC over which it is installed the SCT/LMT program.


161

Warning. For the PDH Radio type equipment, the address and the configuration parameters of the port for the connection with the PC (over which the SCT/LMT program is currently running) have to be set into the “PPP-RS232” card, because the “LCT PPP” card for this specific equipment type is not available. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field. •

IP PPP NetMask box. It is the mask for the network address. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255.

•

PPP Baud Rate area. Transmission rate of the port: 9600, 19200, 38400 or 57600. To change the parameter select the desired option push-button.

Warning. The functioning mode of the PPP protocol is Automatic . This means that the system automatically sets the IP PPP Address of the equipment under examination plus 1 to the element (PC) placed at the other line end 122.

“PPP Radio” card Warning. The system displays the PPP Radio card only if it has been selected a radio equipment (SDH, PDH). •

IP PPP Address box. IP (Internet Protocol) PPP (Point to Point Protocol) address of the communication port (radio side) represented by the radio signal. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

•


•

PPP Mode area. Functioning mode of the PPP protocol: as Client or as Server. To change the parameter selects the desired option push-button.

“PPP-E1 (2Mb/s)” card Warning. The system displays the PPP-E1 card (2Mb/s) only if it has been selected a PMP type equipment. The communication parameters described here below refer to the E1 communication ports (2Mb/s) of the Proxy equipment (or IP Box) 118. •

IP PPP Address box. IP (Internet Protocol) PPP (Point to Point Protocol) address of the communication port represented by the E1 (2Mb/s) signal. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

•

IP PPP NetMask box. It is the mask for the network address.

122

For instance, if, to the equipment (to which it is connected the SCT/LMT program), it has been assigned the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.2, the system will automatically set the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.3 to the PC placed at the other line end.

162


To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. •

PPP Mode area. Functioning mode of the PPP protocol: as Client or as Server. To change the parameter selects the d esired option push-button.

•

E1 signal box. Use of the E1 signal (2Mb/s). The wording: −

Disable, points out that the E1 signal (2Mb/s) can not be used by the Proxy equipment.

−

Master-PMP connector, points out that the master station is connected with the Proxy through the spare bits of the timeslot 0 relevant to the E1 signal connected with the PMP connector of the Proxy equipment.

−

Master-SWITCH connector, points out that the master station is connected with the Proxy through the spare bits of the timeslot 0 relevant to the E1 signal connected with the connector of the Proxy equipment.

−

PPP/IP-PMP connector, points out that the master station is connected with the Proxy through the RS232 serial cable and that on the E1 signal, connected with the PMP connector of the Proxy equipment, it has been enabled a PPP/IP Nx64 channel. The system displays the setting of the time slots used for the PPP/IP channel into the Time Slot Assignment field.

−

PPP/IP-SWITCH connector, points out that the master station is connected with the Proxy through the RS232 serial cable and that on the E1 signal, connected with the connector of the Proxy equipment, it has been enabled a PPP/IP Nx64 channel. The system displays the setting of the time slots used for the PPP/IP channel into the Time Slot Assignment field.

To change the parameter, select the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the value form the list. •

E1 signal clock source box. Synchronism source used for the synchronization of the E1 signal (2Mb/s). Usually, the Proxy equipment does not affect the synchronism present into the network where it is installed. If one of the two E1 ports (PMP and ) is not used and it is not present a valid signal, it is possible to signal an alternative synchronism. With details, the wording: −

PMP connector, points out that the system gets the synchronization of the E1 signal at transmission, with the absence of the signal at reception from the connector, extracting the synchronism from the E1 stream at input to the PMP connector.

−

SWITCH connector, points out that the system gets the synchronization of the E1 signal at transmission, with the absence of the signal at reception from the PMP connector, extracting the synchronism from the E1 stream at input to the connector.

−

INTERNAL, points out that the system gets the synchronization of the E1 signal at transmission from inside the Proxy equipment. This value is significant only if one of the two connectors (PMP or

) is not used.


PMP Master box. Presence of the master station connected with the Proxy equipment. The wording: −

Present, points out that the Proxy equipment is coupled with a master station.

−

Not present, points out that the Proxy equipment is not coupled with a master station (IP Box).


Time Slot assignment Area. Setting of the time slots relevant to the PPP/IP Nx64 channel extracted from the E1 signal (connected with the PMP or connector). Warning. The parameters present into this area are significant only if, into the E1 Signal box, it has been set the PPP/IP-PMP connector value or the PPP/IP-SWITCH connector one. Each one of the four boxes points out the setting of a timeslot (64Kb/s). with details, the wording/number: − −

Not used , points out that the timeslot is not used. 01, 02, 03….31, points out that the system respectively uses the timeslot 01, 02, 03…. 31.


163

To change the setting of the timeslots, select the arrows placed on the side of the relevant boxes to increase/decrease the pointed out value.

“Agg. West” card Warning. The system displays the Agg. West card only if it has been selected a ADM-C equipment. •

IP PPP Address box. IP (Internet Protocol) PPP (Point to Point Protocol) address of the communication port represented by the west side aggregate signal. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

•


•


•

STM1 QECC Enable box. Setting of the DCC channel (Data Communication Channel) at west side of the aggregate signal. The wording: −

Disable, points out that the DCC channel is disabled.

−

d1-d3, points out that the system uses the bytes D1...D3 (192Kb/s) of the RSOH section (Regenerator Section OverHead) relevant to the STM1 signal.

−

d4-d12 Network, points out that the system uses the bytes D4...D12 (576Kb/s) of the MSOH section (Multiplexer Section OverHead) relevant to the STM1 signal.

To change the parameter selects the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the value from the list.

“Agg. East” card Warning. The system displays the Agg. East card only if it has been selected a ADM-C equipment. •

IP PPP Address box. IP (Internet Protocol) PPP (Point to Point Protocol) address of the communication port represented by the east side aggregate signal. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Warning. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

•


•


•

STM1 QECC Enable box. Setting of the DCC channel (Data Communication Channel) at east side of the aggregate signal. The wording: −

Disable, points out that the DCC channel is disabled.

−

d1-d3, points out that the system uses the bytes D1...D3 (192Kb/s) of the RSOH section (Regenerator Section OverHead) relevant to the STM1 signal.

−

d4-d12 Network, points out that the system uses the bytes D4...D12 (576Kb/s) of the MSOH section (Multiplexer Section OverHead) relevant to the STM1 signal.

To change the parameter selects the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the value from the list.

164


To execute the software re-starting of the equipment 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Port Configuration command. The system displays the Configuration Port window. 4. Choose the Restart push-button. The system displays the message “Are you sure you want to restart the equipment?”. 5. Press Yes to execute the operation.

To reset the routing table “Stored” 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – Port Configuration command. The system displays the Configuration Port window. 4. Select the Reset push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. 5. Choose the Confirm changes ? push-button. Warning. The elements inserted by the user are not removed from the routing table. The routing table will be refreshed at the first restart of the equipment.

5.5.11.4 Equipment - Communication Setup – OSPF Equipment status User profile



The OSPF option allows checking and changing the configuration parameters of the selected equipment (router) relevant to the OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) routing dynamic protocol. Warning. The subject option is not available if the equipment firmware does not support the OSPF functionality or if the functionality is not enabled (see Equipment Features Management command).

The choice of the command opens the OSPF window shown in Figure 30. If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the elements present into the OSPF window, it is possible to check the parameters and to execute some relevant operations:


165

•

OSPF PROTOCOL −

to check the parameters of the OSPF protocol

−

to set the router ID address Warning. The operation can not be executed if the OSPF process is on pr ogress.

−

to activate/deactivate the OSPF process for all the supervisory interfaces of the equipment

−

to configure the equipment as ASBR router (Autonomous System Border Router) 123

•

AREAS and INTERFACES −

to check the OSPF configuration parameters of the equipment areas and interfaces

−

to change the OSPF configuration parameters of an area

−

to change the OSPF configuration parameters of an interface

−

to create a new area

−

to remove an area

−

to move an interface from an area to another one Warning. The subject operation can not be executed if the interface is in active status.

•

•

•

•

•

VIRTUAL LINKS −

to check and to change the configuration of a virtual link

−

to create a new virtual link

−

to remove a virtual link

ROUTE SUMMARIZATION −

to check and to change the configuration of a Route Summarization

−

to create a new Route Summarization

−

to remove a Route Summarization

HOSTS −

to check and to change the configuration of a Host

−

to create a new Host

−

to remove a Host

LINK STATE ADVERTISEMENT −

to check the list of the LSA (Link State Advertisements) State Database 125

−

to check the list of the External LSA

present into the Link

to the Autonomous System

127

NEIGHBORS −

•

126

124

to check the list of the neighbors

VIRTUAL NEIGHBORS −

to check the list of the virtual neighbors

123

The ASBR routers act as gateways from and to other Autonomous Systems and they execute the distribution of the necessary “routes” to reach the external system. 124

The LSA is a unit of data describing the local state of a router or network. For a router, this includes the state of the router’s interface and adjacencies. 125

Every router (equipment) in an Autonomous System creates one or more Link State Advertisements (LSA). The collection of the LSA’s constitutes the Link State Database. 126

The External Link report the information concerning the external destinations of the Autonomous System. They are created by the ASBR and the system forwards them to all the routers of the OSPF domain. 127

Group of routers that exchange one each other some routing information through a routing common parameter.

166


Figure 30



(2)


(3)


Properties push-button, allows checking and/or changing the general configuration parameters of the OSPF protocol.

•

Areas/Ifs push-button, allows checking and/or changing the configuration parameters of the equipment OSPF interfaces and of the area or areas that contain the interfaces themselves.

•

Virtual Links push-button, allows creating/deleting virtual links and checking the parameters of the existing virtual links.

•

Summ. push-button, allows creating/deleting the route summarizations checking/changing the parameters of the existing route summarizations

•

Hosts, push-button, allows creating/deleting the hosts and checking/changing the parameters of the existing hosts

•

Lsa DB push-button, allows checking the list of the LSA’s (Link State Advertisements) 124 present into the Link State Database.

•

Ext Lsa DB push-button, allows checking the list of the External LSA’s only.

•

Neighbors push-button, allows checking the list of the neighbors.

•

V. Neighbors push-button, allows checking the parameters of the virtual neighbors.

•

and

Store push-button, allows recording the values of the parameters changed (after the opening of the OSPF window or from the last time that the operator has selected the


167

push-button under examination) into the flash memory of the equipment controller. The push-button choice has to be confirmed. Warning. If the operator changes the value of one or more OSPF parameters and communicates it to the equipment (selection of the Apply push-button present into every window) but he does not select the Store push-button, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system will not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory. •

Help push-button, allows displaying the help on-line page relevant to the OSPF window.

To check the parameters of the OSPF protocol 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Properties push-button. The system displays the OSPF Properties window shown in Figure 31.

Figure 31

168




(2)


(3)

If the box is:

(4)

(5)

•

deactivated (), the OSPF process is deactivated.

•

activated (), the OSPF process is activated.

If the box is: •

deactivated (), the equipment is configured as ASBR router.

•

activated (), the equipment is not configured as ASBR router.

With details the parameter: •

(6)

Version Number , points out the current version number of the OSPF pr otocol.

•

Area Border Router, points out if this router is an ABR (Area Border Router)

•

External LSA Count, points out the number Advertisements) 124 in the Link-State database.

of

external

LSA

128

.

(Link

State

•

External LSA Checksum Sum, points out the sum of the LS checksums of the external Link State Advertisements contained in the Link State database.

•

Originate LSA Count, points out the number of new LSA (Link-State Advertisements) that have been originated. This number is incremented each time the router originates a new LSA.

•

New LSAs, points out the number of Link-State Advertisements received determined to be new instantiations.

With details the: • •

Refresh push-button, reads again the values from the equipment. Apply push-button, communicates to the equipment the new set values. The operator has to confirm the selection of the subject push-button. Warning. To record the new values into the flash memory of the equipment, it is necessary to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window) and to confirm the selection. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To set the router ID address 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Properties push-button. The system displays the OSPF Properties window (refer to Figure 31). 4. Type, into the Router ID box , the desired value. Warning. For the Siae equipment, the default Router ID address corresponds to the IP Address of the IP Ethernet communication port. The box is not available if the OSPF process have been activated (OSPF Process Active box – refer to Figure 31).

128

The ABR routers have interfaces belonging to more areas.


169

5. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To activate/deactivate the OSPF process 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Properties push-button. The system displays the OSPF Properties window (refer to Figure 31). 4. To activate the OSPF process, activate the OSPF Process Active box. To deactivate the OSPF process, deactivate the OSPF Process Active box. 5. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To configure the equipment as ASBR router 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Properties push-button. The system displays the OSPF Properties window (refer to Figure 31). 4. To configure the equipment as ASBR router, activate the Autonomous System Border Router box. To prevent the configuration of the equipment as ASBR router, deactivate the Autonomous System Border Router box. 5. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To check the OSPF configuration parameters of the equipment areas and interfaces 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command.

170


The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Areas/IFs push-button. The system displays the OSPF Areas/IFs window (refer to Figure 32).

Figure 32



(2)


(3)

With details the: •

Add push-button, creates a new area

•

Remove push-button, deletes an area

•

Refresh push-button, reads again the values from the equipment.


171

•

Apply push-button, communicates to the equipment the new set values. The operator has to confirm the selection of the subject push-button. Warning. To record the new values into the flash memory of the equipment, it is necessary to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

(4)

The area is identified by: •

•

The symbol + or –. The symbol + allows expanding the area showing the list of the equipment interfaces present into the area itself. When the operator has executed the selection, the system replaces the symbol + with the symbol -, when the operator selects such a symbol, the system iconizes the option. The symbol

.

Warning. The symbol identifies the areas created by the user and not yet communicated to the equipment. •

The wording Area

•

The identification number of the area. Warning. The value 0.0.0.0 identifies the backbone OSPF area.

(5)

The interface is identifies by: •

The symbol

.

Warning. The symbol: −

identifies the interfaces that have been moved from an area to the other one and their movement have not been yet communicated to the equipment.

−

identifies the interfaces that can not be moved from an area to the other one because their status is active.

•

The IP address of the interface

•

The name of the equipment supervisory port that corresponds to the IP address. With details, the wording: −


−

Lct , identifies the port for the connection with the PC over which it has been installed the SCT/LMT application program.

−


−

−

(6)

Radio, identifies the communication port (radio side) represented by the radio signal (communication port pr esent into the radio equipment: PDH, SDH). RS232 – 2Mb/s, identifies the communication port RS232 (communication port present into the radio equipment: PDH-AL).

or

2Mbps

If it has been selected an AREA, the parameters displayed by the system are the following ones: •

Stub Area, it points out the area type. With details, the value: −

Yes, points out that it is forbidden the acquisition, executed by the subject router, of the external packets of the area (area of Stub type).

−

No, it points out that it is not forbidden the acquisition of the external packets of the area.

The parameter can be changed. •

Spf Runs, points out the number of times that the intra-area route table has been calculated using this area's Link State database. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

Bdr Rtr Count , points out the total number of Area Border Routers reachable within this area. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

As Bdr Rtr Count , points out the total number of ASBR (Autonomous System Border Router) reachable within this area. The parameter is a reading only one.

172


•

Lsa Count , points out the total number of LSA (Link State Advertisements) 124 in this area's Link-State database, excluding AS (Autonomous System 127 ) External LSA's 126. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

Lsa Cksum Sum, points out the sum of the Link-State Advertisements contained in this area's Link-State database. This sum excludes external LSA. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

Summary LSAs (Stub Area), points out the import of Summary LSAs into stub areas. With details, if it has been selected the value: −

No, the router will neither originate nor propagate Summary LSAs into the stub area.

−

Yes, the router will both summarize and propagate Summary LSAs.


Stub Default Cost. If the area has been configured as a stub area and the router itself is an Area Border Router, the p arameter indicates the cost of the default summary LSA that the router should advertise into the area. The parameter can be changed.

•

Status, points out the status of the area. With details the value: −

Active, points out that the area is active.

−

Not In Service, points out that the area is not on service (value forced by the user)

−

Not Ready , points out that the area is not available (starting value of the area)

The parameter can be changed. If it has been selected an INTERFACE, the displayed parameters are the following ones: •

IF Type, it points out the type of OSPF interface that corresponds to the type of supervisory interface relevant to the selected equipment. With details, the value: −

Broadcast , points out the Lan interface (IP Ethernet).

−

Point To Point , points out the point-point interface (Radio PPP, RS-232 PPP, etc.)

The parameter is a reading only one. •

Admin Status, points out the OSPF interface's administrative status. With details the value: −

−

Enabled, points out that the administration status of the OSPF interface has been enabled. Disabled, points out that the administration status of the OSPF interface has been disabled.

The parameter can be changed. Warning. The parameter can be disabled or enabled only if the OSPF process is active (refer to Figure 31). When the OSPF process has been disabled it is not possible to change the subject parameter. •

Status points out the status of the interface. With details the value: −

Active, points out that the interface is active.

−

Not In Service, points out that the interface is not on service (value forced by the user)

−

Not Ready , points out that the interface is not available (starting value of the interface)


Rtr Priority , points out the priority of this interface. This field is used in the Designated Router election for an interface of broadcast type. The value 0 points out that the interface is not enabled for the election of the Designated Router. The number 1 points out the highest priority value, while the value 255 the lowest one. The parameter can be changed.

•

Transit Delay , points out the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State update packet over this interface. The parameter can be changed.

•

Retrans Interval , points out the number of seconds between LSA retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.


173


Hello Interval , points out the length of time, in seconds, between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface. The parameter can be changed.

•

Rtr Dead Interval , points out the number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen before it's neighbors declare the router down. The parameter can be changed.

•

State, points out the OSPF Interface State. With details the value: −

Down, points out the initial interface state. In this state no pr otocol traffic at all will be sent or received on such a interface.

−

Loopback , in this state, the router’s interface to the network is looped back.

−

Waiting, in this state the router is trying to determine the identity of the (Backup) Designated Router for the network.

−

Point To Point , in this state the interface is operational and connects to a physical point to point network.

−

Designated Router , in this state, this router itself is the Designated Router on the attached network.

−

Backup Designated Router , in this state the router itself is the Backup Designated Router on the attached network. It will be promoted to Designated Router when the present designated router fails.

−

Other Designated Router , the interface is to a broadcast or NBMA (NonBroadcast Multi-Access) network on which another router has been selected to be the designated router. In this state the router itself has not been selected Backup Designated Router either.

The parameter is a reading only one. •

Designated Router , points out the route ID of the Designated Router. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

Backup Designated Router , points out the route ID of the Backup Designated Router. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

Events, points out the number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state, or an error has occurred. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

Auth Key , points out the authentication key. The parameter can be changed.

•

Auth Type, points out the authentication procedure to be used on the interface. With details the value: −

None, points out that into the interface, it is not used any authentication procedure

−

Simple Password , points out the OSPF “simple password” authentication procedure.

−

Md5 , points out the OSPF “cryptographic” authentication procedure.


Metric Value, points out the cost of sending a packet on the interface, expressed in the Link State metric. The parameter can be changed.

•

Properties, point out if an interface has to be treated as a passive interface 129 and, only for broadcast and LAN interfaces, enables/disables the control of the connection in the network. With details the value: −

No Passive/No Check, points out that the interface is not a passive one and the control of the connection in the network is disabled.

−

Passive/No Check, points out that the interface is a passive one e and the control of the connection in the network is disabled.

−

−

No Passive/Check, points out that the interface is not a passive one and the control of the connection in the network is enabled. Passive/Check, points out that the interface is a passive one ed and the control of the connection in the network is enabled.

129

Into an interface defined as a “passive” one, the system does not forward the Hello packets.

174


The parameter can be changed. Warning. It is not possible to change the parameter if the interface is in the active status (refer to Status parameter). •

Auth Key ID, points out the identification key (Key Id) used by the “cryptographic” OSPF authentication procedure (Md5). The parameter can be changed.

(7)

The symbol: •

(yellow), points out that the user can change the parameter and the pointed put value is the one currently set into the equipment.

•

(grey), points out that the parameter can usually be changed but in the subject condition, its setting is prevented by the status of one of the other parameters, for instance the Properties parameter can not be changed if the status of the interface is active.

•

, points out that the user has changed the parameter but the new value has not been yet communicated and stored into the equipment.

•

, points out that the user can not change the parameter.

To change the OSPF configuration parameters of an area 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Areas/IFs push-button. The system displays the OSPF Areas/IFs window (refer to Figure 32). 4. Select the desired (

) area.

5. Select quickly twice the parameter to be changed (

).

The system displays the window. 6. Set the desired value. The description of each parameter and of its values are displayed in Figure 32 note 6. 7. Press the OK push-button. Into the OSPF Areas/IFs window, the symbol ranges from

up to

.

8. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or r eset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To change the OSPF configuration parameters of an interface 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Areas/IFs push-button. The system displays the OSPF Areas/IFs window (refer to Figure 32). 4. Select the desired (

) interface.


175


).

The system displays the window. 6. Set the desired value. The description of each parameter and of its values are displayed in Figure 32 note 6. 7. Press the OK push-button. Into the OSPF Areas/IFs window, the symbol ranges from

up to

.


To create a new area 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Areas/IFs push-button. The system displays the OSPF Areas/IFs window (refer to Figure 32). 4. Select the Areas record. 5. Select the Add push-button. The system displays the OSPF Add Area window. 6. Type into the Area ID box the number that identifies the new area. Warning. The value 0.0.0.0 identifies the backbone OSPF area. It is not possible to assign the same identification number to two different areas. 7. Set into the Stub Area box, the type of area. With details select the value: •

Yes, to forbid the acquisition, executed by the subject router, of the external packets of the area (area of Stub type).

•

No, to allow the acquisition of the external packets of the area.

Warning. The backbone area can not be an area of Stub Area type. Into a Stub Area, it is not possible to configure virtual links and it can not be present an ASBR (Autonomous System Border Router). 8. Select the Add push-button. The system displays the new area (

) into the OSPF Area/Ifs window.


To remove an area 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30).

176


3. Select the Areas/IFs push-button. The system displays the OSPF Areas/IFs window (refer to Figure 32). 4. Select the area (

or

) to be deleted.

5. Select the Remove push-button. Warning. The system can remove an area only if under such an area there are not interfaces. 6. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To move an interface from an area to another one Warning. The subject operation can not be executed if the interface is in active status (refer to Status parameter - Figure 32 note 6). 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Areas/IFs push-button. The system displays the OSPF Areas/IFs window (refer to Figure 32). 4. Select the interface (

) to be moved and carry it under the new area.

5. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or r eset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To check and to change the configuration of a virtual link 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Virtual Links push-button. The system displays the OSPF Virtual Links window shown in Figure 33. 4. Select the desired virtual link (

).


).

The system displays the window. 6. Set the desired value. The description of each parameter and of its values are displayed in Figure 33 note 5. 7. Press the OK push-button. Into the OSPF Virtual Links window, the symbol ranges from

up to

.

8. Press Apply and then confirm.


177

Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

Figure 33



(2)


(3)


Add push-button, creates a new virtual link

•

Remove push-button, deletes a virtual link

•

Refresh push-button, read again the values from the equipment.

•

Apply push-button, communicates to the equipment the new set values. The operator has to confirm the selection of the subject push-button. Warning. To record the new values into the flash memory of the equipment, it is necessary to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window) and to

178


confirm the selection. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button). (4)

The virtual link is identified by: •

The symbol

.

Warning. The symbol identifies the virtual links created by the user and not yet communicated to the equipment. •

The identification number of the transit area crossed by the virtual link ( Area ID column ).

•

The address (router ID) towards which it has been realized the virtual link (Neighbor ID column ).

•

The status of the virtual interface (State column ). With details, the wording: −

Down, points out the starting status of the interface. In such a status, it will not be possible to forward and to receive from the interface any OSPF traffic.

−

Point To Point , points out the functional status of the interface: Point-Point

Unknown, points out the status (unknown) get by the virtual interface just created and not yet communicated the equipment. (5)


Transit Delay , points out the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this virtual interface. The parameter can be changed.

•

Hello Interval , points out the length of time, in seconds, between the Hello packets that the router sends o n the virtual interface. The parameter can be changed.

•

Rtr Dead Interval , points out the number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen before it's neighbors declare the router down. The parameter can be changed.

•

Events, points out the number of state changes or err or events on this virtual link. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

Auth Key , points out the authentication key. The parameter can be changed.

•

Status, points out the status of the virtual interface. With details the value: − −

−

Active, points out that the interface is active. Not In Service, points out that the interface is not on service (value forced by the user) Not Ready , points out that the interface is not available (starting value of the interface)


Auth Type, points out the authentication type specified for a virtual interface. With details the value: −

None, points out that into the network, it is not used any authentication procedure

−

Simple Password , points out the “simple password” authentication procedure.

The parameter can be changed. (6)

The symbol: •

, points out that the user can change the parameter and the pointed put value is the one currently set into the equipment. , points out that:

• −

−

•

the user has changed the parameter but the new value has not been yet communicated and stored into the equipment. the parameter refers to a virtual link just created but not yet communicated and stored into the equipment. , points out that the user can not change the parameter.


179

To create a new virtual link 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Virtual Links push-button. The system displays the OSPF Virtual Links window shown in Figure 33. 4. Select the Add push-button. The system displays the OSPF Add Virtual Link window. 5. Type into the Virtual Area ID box, the identification number of the transit area crossed by the virtual link. Warning. Usually the identification number of the transit area is not 0.0.0.0 (address of the Backbone area). 6. Type into the Virtual Neighbor (Router ID) area the address (router ID) towards which it has been realized the virtual link. 7. Select the Add push-button. Into the OSPF Virtual Links window, the system points out the new virtual link. 8. ONLY if the user wants to change the value of one or more parameters that characterize the new virtual link, select quickly twice the desired parameter ( ). The system displays the window. 9. Set the desired value. The description of each parameter and of its values are displayed in Figure 33 note 5. 10.Press the OK push-button. 11. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To remove a virtual link 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Virtual Links push-button. The system displays the OSPF Virtual Links window shown in Figure 33. 4. Select the virtual link to be deleted. 5. Select the Remove push-button. Into the OSPF Virtual Links window, the system deletes the virtual link. 6. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

180


To check and to change the configuration of a Route Summarization 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Summ. push-button. The system displays the OSPF Route Summarization window shown in Figure 34. 4. Select quickly twice the desired route summarization. The system displays the Status window. 5. Into the Status box, select the value: •

Active, to set the “active” status.

•

Not In Service, to set the “not on service” status.

•

Not Ready , to set the “unavailable” status.

6. Press the OK push-button. Into the OSPF Route Summarization window, the system switches the symbol of the route summarization from to . 7. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

Figure 34


181



(2)


(3)


Add push-button, creates a new Route Summarization.

•

Remove push-button, deletes a Route Summarization.

•

Refresh push-button, reads again the values from equipment.

•

Apply push-button, communicates to the equipment the new set values. The operator has to confirm the selection of the subject push-button. Warning. To record the new values into the flash memory of the equipment, it is necessary to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

(4)

Each record identifies a Route Summarization. With details, the column: •

Area ID, points out the symbol of the route summarization ( ) and the identification number of the area that contains the networks grouped into the route summarization. Warning. The symbol identifies the route summarizations created by the user and not yet communicated to the equipment; while the symbol points out that the user has changed the status of the route summarization but the new values has not been communicated yet to the equipment.

•

Net , points out the range of addresses that are grouped into the route summarization.

•

Mask, points out the network mask relevant to the network or sub-network.

•

Status, points out the status of the route summarization. With details, the value: − −

−

Active, points out that the route summarization is active. Not In Service, points out that the route summarization is not on service (value forced by the user). Not Ready , points out that the route summarization is not available (starting value).

The parameter can be changed.

To create a new Route Summarization 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Summ. push-button. The system displays the OSPF Route Summarization window shown in Figure 34. 4. Select the Add push-button. The system displays the OSPF Add Aggregate window. 5. Select, into the Area ID box, the identification number of the area. 6. Type, into the Net box, the address of the network or of the sub-network. 7. Type, into the Mask box, the network mask relevant to the network or sub-network 8. Select the Add push-button.

182


Into the OSPF Route Summarization window, the system displays the new route summarization. 9. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or r eset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To remove a Route Summarization 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Summ. push-button. The system displays the OSPF Route Summarization window shown in Figure 34. 4. Select the route summarization to be deleted. 5. Select the Remove push-button. Into the OSPF Route Summarization window, the system deletes the record. 6. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or r eset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To check and to change the configuration of a Host 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Hosts push-button The system displays the OSPF Host Table window shown in Figure 35. 4. Select the desired Host (

).


).

The system displays the window. 6. Set the desired value. The description of each parameter and of its values are displayed in Figure 35 note 5. 7. Press the OK push-button. Into the OSPF Host Table window, the symbol ranges from

up to

.



183

Figure 35



(2)


(3)


Add push-button, creates a new host

•

Remove push-button, deletes a host

•

Refresh push-button, read again the values from the equipment.

•

Apply push-button, communicates to the equipment the new set values. The operator has to confirm the selection of the subject push-button. Warning. To record the new values into the flash memory of the equipment, it is necessary to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window) and to confirm the selection. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

184


(4)

The Host is identified by: •

the symbol

.

Warning. The symbol identifies the hosts created by the user and not yet communicated to the equipment. •

(5)

the Host IP address.


Area ID, indicates identifier of area which the interface belongs to (host). The parameter can be changed.

•

Metric , indicates the cost of the interface (host). The parameter can be changed.

•

Status, points out the status of the interface (host). With details the value: −

Active, points out that the interface is active.

−

Not In Service, points out that the interface is not on service (value forced by the user)

−

Not Ready , points out that the interface is not available (starting value of the interface)

The parameter can be changed. (6)

The symbol: •

, points out that the user can change the parameter and the pointed put value is the one currently set into the equipment. , points out that:

•

•

−

the user has changed the parameter but the new value has not been yet communicated and stored into the equipment.

−

the parameter refers to a virtual link just created but not yet communicated and stored into the equipment. , points out that the user can not change the parameter.

To create a new Host 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Hosts push-button. The system displays the OSPF Host Table window shown in Figure 35. 4. Select the Add push-button. The system displays the OSPF Add Host window. 5. Type the address of the interface, you wish to define as host, into the IP Address box 6. Type the cost of the interface (host) into the Metric box: number within 0 and 65535. 7. Select the identifier of the area, which the interface belongs to (host) into the Area ID box. 8. Select the Add push-button. Into the OSPF Host Table window, the system points out the new Host. 9. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or r eset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).


185

To remove a Host 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Hosts push-button. The system displays the OSPF Hosts Table window shown in Figure 35. 4. Select the host to be deleted.. 5. Select the Remove push-button. Into the OSPF Hosts Table the system deletes the record. 6. Press Apply and then confirm. Warning. If the operator has just executed the last change of the equipment OSPF parameters, he has to remember to select the Store push-button (present into the OSPF window ) and to confirm such an operation. On the contrary, at the switch off/switch on or reset procedure of the equipment, the system does not keep the new values because they have not been recorded into the equipment memory (the subject operation is executed only at the selection of the Store push-button).

To check the list of the LSA present into the Link State Database 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Lsa DB push-button. The system displays the OSPF LSA DB window shown in Figure 36.

Figure 36

186




(2)


(3)

With details the:

(4)

•


•

Abort push-button, stops the reading operation from the equipment.

Each record identifies a Link State Advertisements. With details, the column: •

•

Area ID, points out the LSA symbol ( LSA was received.

) and the identifier of the Area from which the

Type, points out the format and function of the LSA. With details the wording: −

Router Link , points out the LSA originated by all routers. This LSA describes the collected states of the router’s interfaces to an area.

−

Network Link , points out the LSA originated by the Designated Routers for multiaccess segments with more than one attached router. The Network Links describe all routers attached to the specific segment (network).

−

Summary Link , points out the LSA originated by ABR. The Summary Links describe the destinations to an IP network, inside the AS.

−

As Summary Link , points out the LSA originated by ABR. The As Summary Links describe the destinations to ASBR, inside the AS.

•

Ls ID, points out the piece of the routing domain that being described by the LSA. The value of the parameter changes according to the type of LSA and it can correspond to the identification number of a router or to an IP address.

•

Router ID, points out the OSPF router ID of the LSA’s originator.

•

Age, points out the life time (age) of the LSA from its last status change. The system expresses the age by means of seconds. Warning. One LSA lives until to a maximum time (Max Age). After having exceeded the Max Age value, the status of the LSA is not valid longer.

•

Checksum, points out the checksum of the complete contents of the LSA, excepting the LSA age field.

Warning. All the parameters are reading only ones.

To check the list of the External LSA’s 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Ext Lsa DB push-button. The system displays the OSPF Ext LSA DB window shown in Figure 37.


187

Figure 37



(2)


(3)

With details the:

(4)

•


•

Abort push-button, stops the reading operation from the equipment.

Each record identifies an External Link State Advertisements. With details, the column: •

Type, points out the LSA symbol (

) and the function of the LSA.

With details the As External Link wording points out the LSA originated by an ASBR (Autonomous System Boundary Router). Each AS External LSA describes destinations external the Autonomous System or a default route to the outside AS.

188

•

Ls ID, points out the piece of the routing domain that being described by the LSA. The value of the parameter can corresponds to the identification number of a router or to an IP address.

•

Router ID, points out the OSPF router I D of the LSA’s originator.


•

Age, points out the life time (age) of the LSA from its last status change. The system expresses the age by means of seconds. Warning. One LSA lives until to a maximum time (Max Age). After having exceeded the Max Age value, the status of the LSA is not valid longer.

•

Checksum, points out the checksum of the complete contents of the LSA, excepting the LSA age field.

Warning. All the parameters are reading only ones

To check the list of the neighbors 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the Neighbors push-button. The system displays the OSPF Neighbor Table window shown in Figure 38.

Figure 38



(2)


(3)

Each record identifies a neighbor. With details the column:


189

•

IP Address, points out the neighbor symbol ( )IP address this neighbor is using in its IP Source Address. This will not be 0.0.0.0, but the address of another of the neighbor’s interfaces. Warning. The symbol points out that the status of the neighbor has been changed but the new value has not been communicate yet to the equipment.

• •

•

•

IF, points out an interface having an IP Address zero. Rtr ID, points out the value (represented as a type Ip Address) uniquely identifying the neighboring router in the Autonomous System. Options, points out a bit mask corresponding to the neighbor’s options field. With details the value: −

0, points out that the system will operate on Type of Service metrics other than TOS 0.

−

1, points out that the associated area accepts and operates on external information.

−

2, points out that the system is Network Multicast capable.

−

3, points out that the associated area is an NSSA.

Priority, points out the priority of this neighbor in the Designated Router election. The value 0 signifies that the neighbor is not eligible to become the designated router on this particular network.

•

State, points out the status of the link with such a neighbor. With details, the wording: −

Down, points out the initial state of the neighbor conversation. It indicates that there has been no recent information received from the neighbor.

−

Attempt , in this state no recent information has been received from the neighbor, but a more concerted effort should be made to contact the neighbor. This state is only valid for the neighbors attached to NBMA networks.

−

Init , in this state, an Hello packet has recently been seen from the neighbor. However, bi-directional communication has not yet been established with the neighbor.

−

Two Way , in this state, communication between the two routers is bi-directional.

−

Exchange Start , this is the first step in creating an adjacency between the two neighboring routers.

−

Exchange, in this state the router is describing its entire Link State database by sending Database Description Packets to the neighbor).

−

Loading, this state Link State Request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been discovered (but not yet received) in the Exchange state.

−

Full , in this state, the neighboring routers are fully adjacent.

•

Events, points out the number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred.

•

Retrans Q Len, points out the current length of the retransmission queue.

•

Hello Suppressed, points out whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbor. With details the wording: −

False, points out that the packets have not been suppressed

−

True, points out that the packets have been suppressed

Warning. All the parameters are reading o nly ones.

To check the list of the virtual neighbors 1. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the desired equipment. 2. Select the Equipment – Communication Setup – OSPF command. The system displays the OSPF window (refer to Figure 30). 3. Select the V. Neighbors push-button. The system displays the OSPF Virtual Neighbor Table window shown in Figure 39.

190


Figure 39



(2)


(3)

Each record identifies a virtual neighbor. With details, the column: • •

Area, points out the virtual neighbor symbol (

) and the Transit Area Identifier.

Retry ID, points out the value uniquely identifying the neighboring router connected from the virtual link.

•

IP Address, points out the IP address this virtual neighbor is using.

•

Options, points out a bit mask corresponding to the virtual neighbor’s options field. With details the value: −

− •

1, points out that the system will operate on Type of Service metrics other than TOS 0. 2, points out that the system is Network Multicast capable.

State, points out the status of the link with the subject virtual neighbor. The meaning of the wording is the same pointed out for the neighbors. The parameter is a reading only one.

•

Events, points out the number of times this virtual neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred.

•

Retrans Q Len, points out the current length of the retransmission queue.

•

Hello Suppressed, points out whether Hellos are being suppressed to the virtual neighbor. With details the wording: −

False, points out that the packets have not been suppressed

−

True, points out that the packets have been suppressed

Warning. All the parameters are reading only ones.


191

5.5.12 Equipment - IP/OSI Table Alignment Equipment status User profile

Connected/Login Station Operator, System

Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a remote equipment inserted into an OSI network 130. The IP/OSI Table Alignment option allows copying the elements present into the “Remote Element List” of the local equipment, into the “Remote Element List” of the selected equipment. In such a way, it is possible to store into the selected equipment, the correspondence between Ip addresses and OSI ones necessary for the reaching of other r emote equipment. The new elements will be inserted into the list as Not Managed

131

type elements.

To execute such an operation, r espect the following procedure: 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the remote equipment. Warning. The equipment has to be in connected/login status. On the contrary, execute the login of the equipment. 3. Select the IP/OSI Table Alignment option. At the choice of this option, the system displays a message that informs the user that the operation could change the “remote equipment list” of the selected equipment. 4. Select the Yes push-button to continue. The system displays the IP/OSI Table Alignment in progress window that points out the operation execution on progress. Warning. If into the list it is already present a new element, the system does not copy such an element. Into the “remote equipment list” of the selected equipment, it will be present the new elements characterized by the Not Managed type.

5.5.13 Equipment - Disable/Enable Equipment status User profile

Disconnected, Connected/Monitor Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The Disable command allows disabling the selected equipment.

130

The OSI network is a network that uses as communication protocol between the network elements also the OSI protocol (Open System Interconnection). 131

An element of Not Managed type is an element that is not managed by SCT/LMT.

The system uses this type of elements to insert into the “remote equipment list” some information such as for instance the coupling between the IP address and the Gosip one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

192


Warning. This command is not present into the Equipment menu (or into the contextual one) if it has been selected the local equipment or a equipment in connected/login status, because it is not possible to disable.

To disable an equipment means to stop the dialogue between the program and the equipment. Therefore, if the disabled equipment was in: •

connected/monitor status, it is not longer available the status of the alarms, the detail of the current alarms, etc.

•

disconnected status, the system stops the reconnection attempts (if it has been activated the relevant function).

After the choice of this command, the system displays on the video, into the record relevant to the equipment, the wording Disabled by user and it replaces, into the menu, the Disable option with the Enable one. Warning. The equipment remains disabled until when the user enables it again (by means of the Enable command) or when it is deactivated the connection with the local equipment, and therefore, the connection with the disabled equipment.

5.5.14 Equipment – Equipment Features Management Equipment status User profile

Connected/Login System

Warning. The subject command is available obly for equipment of PDH-AL type. The Equipment Features Management command allows verifying the functionalites (capacity and additional services, management of OSPF protocol, etc.) enabled for the selcted equipment.

The choice of the command opens the Equipment Features Management window shown in Figure 40. If the equipment status and the user profile allow it, by means of the elements present into the window, it is possible to enable the new functionalities for the selected equipment. Warning. In order to enable one or more functionalities, IT IS NECESSARY to request to Siae Microelettronica the enabling certificate, represented by a file (with .sfc extension). For each equipment you wish to enable one or more functionalities, a specific enabling certificate is required, because there is an univocal link between each single cerficate and each specific equipment.


193

Figure 40



(2)

The functionalities which can be enabled, on request, for the PDH-AL radio equipment are the following: •

Maximum equipment capacity. In detail: −

−

194

from 8Mb to 16Mb or E1 (8x2Mb) – Upgrade: Eth – troughput from 8Mb to 16Mb/E1 up to 8x2Mb/s from 16Mb to 32Mb or E1 (16x2Mb) – Upgrade: Eth – troughput from 16Mb to 32Mb/E1 up to 16x2Mb/s

−

from 8Mb to 32Mb or 1x34Mb/s or E1 (16x2Mb) – Upgrade: Eth – troughput from 8Mb to 32Mb/1x34Mb/s or E1 up to 16x2Mb/s

−

from 32Mb to 64Mb or 2x34Mb/s or E1 (32x2Mb) – Upgrade: Eth – troughput from 32Mb to 64Mb/3x34mb/s or E1 up to 32x2Mb/s

•

Modulation from 4QAM to 16QAM - Upgrade: From 4QAM to 16QAM

•

Service channels of type “E1 way side” – Additional 1xE1 way side channel, Additional 2xE1 way side channel

•

OSPF protocol – OSPF functionality

•

Calculation of the link margin – Fade Margin


(3)

The wording: •

Enabled, indicates that, for the equipment under examination, the functionality is enabled

•

Disabled, indicates that, for the equipment under examination, the functionality is not enabled.

To enable the new functionalites for the selcted equipment Warning. This operation is available only for radio equipment of PDH-AL type. 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Equipment Features Management. The system displays the Equipment Features Management window. 4. Select the

box.

The system displays the Open siae certificate file window. 5. Select the enabling certificate (file with .sfc extension ) related to the selected equipment. Warning. The enabling certificate (one for each single equipment) is provided by Siae Microelettronica on request. 6. Select the Open push-button. The selected file is indicated in the Certificate file path box. 7. Select the Send Certificate File push-button. A message indicates the end and the result of the operation. In detail, the message: − −

Operation Done, indicates that the operation has been executed with success Invalid operation for this equipment…., indicates that the selected certificate and equipment are not compatible (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.)

5.5.15 Equipment – Equipment Inventory Report Equipment status User profile


Warning. The subject command is available obly for equipment of SDH or PDH-AL type. The Equipment Inventory Report command allows saving to file all the information relevant to the configurations, the addresses, etc. of the selected equipment.

To execute such an operation, respect the following procedure: 1. Into the Station List area (SCT/LMT window), select the station that contains the desired equipment. 2. Select, into the Equipment list area (SCT/LMT window), the equipment.


195

Warning. The equipment has to be in connected/login status. On the contrary, execute the login of the equipment. 3. Select the Equipment – Equipment Inventory Report option. The system displays the SCT Inventory File Location window. 4. Type the file name into the proper box and set the path where saving the file; by default, the directory where the SCT/LMT program is installed and the “equipment_type equipment_data” file name (for example, PDHAccessLink_PDH AL 01_21-07-2004) are suggested. 5. Select the Save push-button. A message is displayed with the result of the operation. Two files having the same name but different extension are saved in the set d irectory. The first one with.html extension, that can be opened by the Windows browser. The second one with .zip extension (compressed file). Inside it, there is a group of files with .csv extension. Each file identifies a group of information. These files. These files can be opened by a word processor program (Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word , etc.). The tables/files where the information about the equipment are subdivided are the following: −

Equipment Configuration. Equipment general configuration: type, protection, baseband, capacity, modulation, etc.

−

HW Inventory . “Serial Number” and “Part Number” of the Hardware units constituting the equipment.

−

Equipment Software Status and Software Unit Table. Software of the equipment: version of the software/firmware modules, status of the memory banks, etc.

−

Address Configuration. Configuration of the supervision ports of the equipment: IP address, NetMask, ecc.

−

Default Gateway. Default Gateway of the equipment.

−

Routing Table. Configuration of the Routing Table of the equipment.

−

Remote Element Table. List of the remote equipment stored on the equipment

−

5.6

Operative Parameters. Radio parameters of the equipment: frequency, power, received level, etc.

Network menu

At the choice of Network menu, the program displays the following commands: •

Admin Tools, it allows defining the “users list” stored into the controller of one or more equipment and checking/changing the reference date/time of the selected equipment.

•

View Logged User, it allows checking the users connected to the equipment (local and remote).

Warning. The Network menu is available only when it has been activated the connection with the local equipment. For each command, in the relative description, it is pointed out the user profile necessary to be able to use it. Then, if the command opens a window where there are some parameters, the system points out also the type of operation that can be executed. The option Reading points out that it is po ssible to check the parameters, the option Writing that it is possible to set or to change them. Warning. The profile refers to the user who has requested the connection with the local equipment. If a command is not available, it means that the function coupled with it is not supported by the selected equipment type.

196


5.6.1

Network - Admin Tools

At the choice of Admin Tools command, the program displays the fo llowing options: •

•

User Manager, it allows defining the “users list” stored into the controller of one or more equipment. Time Settings, it allows checking/changing the reference date/time of the selected equipment.

5.6.1.1 Network - Admin Tools - User Manager User profile

System

The User manager, command allows checking and changing the user list stored into the main controller of the local equipment or of a generic remote one in connected/login status and with System user profile. The “users list” is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment. Warning. If a user is not present into the “users list” memorized into the controller on an equipment, such an user will not be able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment. Each Siae equipment, that can be managed by the SCT/LMT, is equipped with two pr e-defined users: •

SYSTEM. User of the SCT/LMT program , with the following features: −

User name .............System (unchangeable parameter).

−

Timeout .................No Timeout (unchangeable parameter).

−

Profile....................System (unchangeable parameter)

−

Password ...............Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter).

132

.

The SYSTEM user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted. Then, this SCT/LMT user only can create, change and delete the SCT/LMT users. •

NMS5UX. User of the Siae Network Management System 5 UNIX supervisory system , with the following features: −

User name .............NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter).

−

Timeout .................No Timeout (unchangeable parameter).

−

Profile....................System (unchangeable parameter)

−

Password ...............Pre-defined (changeable parameter).

132

.

The NMS5UX user can not be deleted. This user can create, change and delete SCT/LMT users by means of the NMS5UX graphical interface 133. Warning. With the exception of the System and NMS5UX users, all the other users of the “users list” relevant to an equipment have to be set by the SCT/LMT user or by the NMS5UX user.

The choice of the command opens the User Manager window shown in Figure 41. The commands present into the window, allow the execution of the following operations: •

to set or to change the “user list”

132

The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward commands or to execute changing (writing operation) into the SCT/LMT and LCT… programs. 133

More info concerning the NMS5UX system are reported in the relevant Siae documentation.


197

Into each list, it is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 users for each profile (up to a maximum of 12 users). Warning. It is possible to set and to communicate the same list, at the same time, to more equipment. •

to check the “user list” actually stored into an equipment

•

to delete the “user list” actually stored into an equipment

•

to save and then to restore from a file the “user list”

•

to change the following passwords and timeout stored into the controller of one or more equipment:

•

−

password and timeout of the System user (System Password)

−

network password

−

password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM Password)

134

and network timeout (Network Password)

to set the IP address of remote machines (PCs, servers or workstations) that contain a remote user (different from SCT/LMT user or from NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment. This user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that he does not need for a login password. It is possible to set a maximum of 2 remote users.

Figure 41

134

The network password is necessary to be able to activate the connection with the remote equipment.

198



For each user into the several columns, the system points out the following information: •

User Name. The user name. The wording (Deleted), placed after the user name points out that the user has been removed from the list.

•

Profile. The user profile. The user with: −

Read only profile, can check the parameters (reading operation) but it can not forward commands or execute changing (writing operation) into the SCT/LMT and LCT... programs.

−

Read and write and Station operator profile, can as check the parameters (reading operation) as forward commands or execute changing (writing operation) into the SCT/LMT and LCT... programs.

Warning. These profiles can not change the list of the remote equipment , the users list, change the equipment date/time, force the login and the logout of an user and all the operations available only for the System user (or NMS5UX one). Warning. The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the User area of the User Manager window. •

Timeout (Sec). Status of the Timeout option. The Timeout option is a time during which the program does not execute operations, the user is automatically disconnected and therefore it is disconnected also the equipment 135. The wording:

•

−

No timeout, points out that the operation is disabled, this means that the user is not automatically disconnected after a defined time range.

−

Sec. points out that the option is enabled, this means that the user (if the program does not execute any operation), he is disconnected after the pointed out time range.

Password . Access code. For privacy reasons, the system points out the password by means of an asterisk series (*) or by means of the Unknown wording. The asterisks (*) point out the password of the user just created or changed. The wording Unknown points out the password relevant to the user already present into the “user list” read by the equipment 136.

(2)

For each equipment, the system points o ut the following information: •

NE Label . Network identification code. The wording (Local) points out the local equipment.

•

IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent).

•

Operation. The wording: −

Write Users or Erasing Table, point out that there is operation on progress (a green triangle is pointed out on the R.H. side of the check box).

−

Completed or Appended or Table Erased, point out that the last executed operation has been successfully ended (a green square is pointed out on the R.H. side of the check box).

−

Error, points out that the last executed operation has been aborted (a red square is pointed out on the R.H. side of the check box).

135

The program manages a polling cycle to check the presence of the SCT/LMT – equipment connection. If the equipment does not answer to the queries of the management program during the set time (timeout), the user is automatically disconnected and therefore it is disconnected also the equipment. 136

During the reading operation of the “user list” present into the equipment, the controller does not communicate to the program the user password, then, such a password will be pointed out as “unknown” into the User Manager window.


199

To set or to change the “user list” 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window. 2. To add a user to the list: a. Press the Add User push button. The system displays the Add User window. b. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8). Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list. Then, when the user name has been assigned. it can not be changed later. c. Into the Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8). d. Into the Confirm Password box, type newly the access code of the user. e. Into the Timeout area, select the option push-button: −

−

No timeout push-button, if the user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range. Timeout push-button, if the user, (if the program does not execute any operation), has to be disconnected after the time range set into the Sec box.

To change the time range, activate the Sec. box and type a value between 1 second and 43200 seconds (12h). f.

Into the Profile area, select the option push-button relevant to the profile to be assigned to the user: Read only, Read and write or Station operator. Warning. It is not possible to create a user with System profile.

g. Choose the Ok push-button. The new user is inserted into the User area and he is pointed out by means of a marking symbol and by a series of asterisks. h. Repeat the steps a....g, to create all the desired users. Warning. Into each list, it is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 users for each profile (up to a maximum of 12 users). 3. To delete a user from the list: a. Select the record relevant to the user. b. Press the Remove User push-button. Into the User Name column, on the side of the user name, the system displays the wording (Deleted). The system changes the label of the Remove User push-button in Undo Remove User . 4. To “recover” a deleted user: a. Select the record relevant to the deleted user: (Deleted). b. Press the Undo Remove User push-button. Into the User Name column, on the side of the name of the user, the system removes the wording (Deleted). The system changes the label of the Undo Remove User pushbutton in Remove User . 5. To change a user into the list: a. Select the record relevant to the user. b. Press the Modify User push-button. The system displays the Modify User window. c. Execute the desired changing. The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out for the adding of a new user. Warning. It is necessary to set again all the user parameters (password, timeout, profile) with the exception of the user name that can not b e changed. d. Choose the Ok push-button.

200


6. To reset the user list present into the User area, press the Clear User List push-button. 7. When it has been set the desired list into the Network Elements area, activate the boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be communicated the new user list. It is possible to activate more boxes at the same time. Warning. Into the window, the system points out only the equipment in connected/login status and the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) has to have the System profile. 8. Select the Actions button and choose the following command from the displayed pop-up: •

Send new list in overwrite mode, to replace, to the list stored into the equipment, the new “users list”. Warning. If into the new “user list”, there are some users with an “unknown” password (users with the wording Unknown, into the Password column – refer to Figure 41), the system will not execute the operation, because it is not possible to communicate to the equipment a list with users without a defined password.

•

Send new list in update mode, to add, to the list stored into the equipment, the new “users list” (users displayed into the User area pointed out by a marking symbol - refer to Figure 41).

Warning. In both the cases, the system does not forward to the equipment the users with the name coupled with the wording (Deleted) (deleted users). At the end of the operation, into the Operation column, it is pointed out the operation result.

To check the “user list” stored into an equipment 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window. 2. Into the Network Elements area, select the equipment with the list to be checked. It is not possible to select more equipment at the same time. Warning. Into the window, the system points out only the equipment in connected/login status and the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) has to have the System profile. 3. Choose the Retrieve push-button. Into the User area, it is displayed the “users list” actually stored into the selected equipment.

To erase the “user list” stored into an equipment 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window. 2. Into the Network Elements area, activate the boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be erase the user list. It is possible to activate more boxes at the same time. Warning. Into the window, the system points out only the equipment in connected/login status and the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) has to have the System profile. 3. Choose the Actions - Erase User table push-button and then confirm. At the end of the operation, into the Operation column, it is pointed out the operation result.


201

To save the “user list” into a file 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window. 2. Set the desired “user list” 3. Choose the Save to file push-button. The system displays the Save user configuration file window. 4. Into the proper box, type the file name (with .usr extension ) and set the path to be used to save the file. By default, the system suggests the folder where it has been installed the SCT/LMT program. 5. Choose the Save push-button.

To display the “user list” stored into a file 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window. 2. Choose the Retrieve from file push-button. The system displays the Open user configuration file window. 3. Select the file (with .usr extension ) where it has been stored the desired “user list”. 4. Choose the Open push-button. Into the User area, the system displays the “user list”.

To change the password and the timeout of the System user 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window. 2. Into the Network Elements area, activate the check box of the equipment for which it has to be changed the password of the relevant System user. It is possible to activate all the desired boxes. Warning. Into the window, the system points out only the equipment in connected/login status and the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) has to have the System profile. 3. Press the System Password push-button. The system displays the Change System Password window. 4. Into the Enter ‘SYSTEM’ Password box, type the actual access code of the System user. 5. Into the Enter new password box, type the new access code of System user (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8). 6. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the access code. 7. Into the Timeout area, select the o ption push-button: •

•

No timeout push-button, if the System user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range. Timeout push-button, if the System user, (if the program does not execute any operation), has to be disconnected after the time range set into the Sec box.

To change the time range, activate the Sec. box and type a value between 1 second and 43200 seconds (12h). 8. Choose the Ok push-button.

202


To change the network password and timeout 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window. 2. Into the Network Elements area, activate the check box of the equipment for which it has to be changed the network password. It is possible to activate all the desired boxes. Warning. Into the window, the system points out only the equipment in connected/login status and the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) has to have the System profile. 3. Press the Network Password push-button. The system displays the Change Network Password window. 4. Into the Enter ‘SYSTEM’ Password box, type the access code of the System user. 5. Into the Enter new password box, type the new network password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8) 6. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the new network password. 7. Into the Timeout area, select the option push-button: •

No timeout push-button, if the remote equipment (if it is in connected/monitor status) has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range.

•

Timeout push-button, if the remote equipment (if it is in connected/monitor status), when the program is not executing any operation, has to be disconnected after the time range set into the Sec box.


To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password) Warning. The changing of the CEM password has to be executed only if it is changed the default password used by the NMS5UX supervisory system. 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window. 2. Into the Network Elements area, activate the check box of the equipment for which it has to be changed the CEM password. It is possible to activate all the desired boxes. Warning. Into the window, the system points out only the equipment in connected/login status and the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) has to have the System profile. 3. Press the CEM Password push-button The system displays the Change CEM Password window. 4. Into the Enter ‘SYSTEM’ Password box, type the access code of the System user. 5. Into the Enter new password box, type the new CEM password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8) 6. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the CEM password. 7. Into the Timeout area, select the option push-button: •

•

No timeout push-button, if the NMS5UX user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range. Timeout push-button, if the NMS5UX user, (if the program does not execute any operation), has to be disconnected after the time range set into the Sec box.


203


To set the IP address of “remote users” 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – User Manager command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the User Manager window.

2. Into the Network Elements area, activate the check box of the equipment for which it has to be set the IP address of “remote users”. It is possible to activate all the desired boxes. Warning. Into the window, the system points out only the equipment in connected/login status and the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) has to have the System profile. 3. Press the Permanent Login push-button. The system displays the Permanent Login window. 4. Into the SnmP Manager IP Address 1 box, set the I P address of the machine relevant the first remote user. It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 5. Into the SnmP Manager IP Address 2 box, set the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user. It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 6. If the user selects the Reset push-button, on the side of the relevant SnmP Manager IP Address … box, the system po ints out again the value displayed at the window opening. 7. Press Apply push-button and then confirm.

5.6.1.2 Network - Admin Tools - Time Settings User profile

System

The Time Settings command allows checking the r eference date/time of the selected equipment. The choice of the command opens the window shown in Figure 42. The commands present into the Time Settings window allows the execution of the following operations: •

to update the reference date/time of the selected equipment

•

to update the reference date/time of all the equipment (local and remote).

The equipment date/time is aligned with the current one of the Personal Computer. Warning. To be able to update the date/time of an equipment, it is necessary that such an equipment is in connected/login status and that the profile of the user who has requested the login is System.

204


Figure 42


If it is not set any network identification code, the system points out the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.

(2)


(3)

The date/time format changes according to the setting executed into the relevant Windows system.

To update the reference date/time of the selected equipment 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – Time Settings command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Time Settings window. 2. Choose the Align time to current equipment push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. Warning. The operation could cause the logout of the user. 3. Press Yes. The value, present into the Equipment Date/Time box, is updated with the one present into the PC Date/Time box.


205

To update the date/time of all the equipment listed Warning. The command acts on all the equipment in connected/login status, for which the user who has requested the login has the System profile. 1. Choose the Network – Admin Tools – Time Settings command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Time Settings window. 2. Press the Align time to all equipment push-button. The system displays a confirmation window. Warning. The operation could cause the logout of the user. 3. Press Yes. If into the list, there are some equipment in connected/monitor or connected/login status with profile different from System, the system does not update the date/time but displays the following message: “You must be logged as System on . Continue to the next equipment?”. 4. Choose Yes to continue the alignment operation of the date/time for all the other equipment.

5.6.2

Network - View Logged User

User profile

Reading: Reading/Writing:

Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The View Logged User command allows checking the users connected to the equipment (local and remote), at the command choice. The choice of the command opens the window shown in Figure 43.

If the user profile allow it, by means of the push-buttons present into the Logged User Viewer window, it is possible: •

to force the remote login of a user This operation consists of the requesting of a user login (of the user who is using the SCT/LMT or NMS5UX program, in execution on a remote machine) for a generic equipment present into the Logged User Viewer window.

•

to force the logout of a user This operation consists of forwarding the disconnection command for a generic user present into the Logged User Viewer window.

206


Figure 43


The symbol: •

, points out that the user has requested the equipment login. Into the SCT/LMT graphical interface used by the user under examination, the equipment will result in connected/login status.

•

,points out that the user has not requested the equipment login. Into the SCT/LMT graphical interface used by the user under examination, the equipment will result in connected/monitor status. Warning. To the last condition, the system automatically assigns the Read Only profile.

(2)

The wording NMS5UX points out the user of the Siae Network Management System 5 UNIX supervisory system or a remote user (different from SCT/LMT user or from NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login). The other ones identify the SCT users.

(3)

With the wording machine, it is intended the PC (for the SCT/LMT users) or the server, the workstation (for the NMS5UX users and remote users) on which the program used by the user is actually running.


207

To force the remote login of a user 1. Choose the Network – View Logged User command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Logged User Viewer window. 2. Select the equipment (line

...)

137

for which it has to be forced the remote login of a user.

Warning. The operation can be successfully ended only if the user is present into the user list of the selected equipment. 3. Press the Force Login command. The system displays the Force Login window. Into the Equipment: field, it is pointed out the network identification code of the selected equipment. 4. Into the Enter System User Password box, type the password coupled to the System user. 5. Into the Host IP Address box, type the IP address of the machine (PC, server or workstation) on which it has been loaded and it is actually running the SCT/LMT or NMS5UX program used by the user involved in the login forcing. 6. Into the User box, type the identification name of the user. 7. Into the Password box, type the password o f the user. 8. Select the Ok push-button.

To force the logout of a user 1. Choose the Network – View Logged User command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Logged User Viewer window. 2. Select the user (line

...).

3. Press the Force Logout command. The system displays the Force Logout window. Into the Equipment: field, the system points out the network identification code of the equipment to which the selected user is in login. 4. Into the Enter System User Password box, type the password coupled to the System user. 5. Press the Force Logout User: push-button. Into the Logged User Viewer window, the system removes the line relevant to the selected user. Warning. If it is forced the logout of a NMS5UX user, the NMS5UX supervisory system automatically executes the restore of the user login.

137

It is possible to select every user connected to the equipment.

208


5.7

Options menu

The choice of the Options menu opens the Options window where there are the: •

General card.

•

Connection card.

•

Acknowledge card.

Warning. The Options menu is always available. In fact, it is not affected by the status of the connection between the program and the equipment.

5.7.1

Options - ‘’General’’ card


Disconnected, Connected/Monitor, Co nnected/Login Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The parameters present into the General card (shown in Figure 44) allow executing the following operations: •

to activate and to deactivate the recording of the alarms/events into the “alarm history” The “alarm history” is the assembly of signals communicated by the equipment in connected status (login or monitor), that are stored on the PC hard disk and displayed into the Alarm history log area of the SCT/LMT main window. Warning. If the user has deactivated the recording of the signals into the “alarm history”, the system does not memorize the signals into the disk of the PC but however, it will display them into the Alarm history log area. But, in such a case, at the closing and at the new opening of the SCT/LMT window, such signals will not be present longer into the Alarm history log area 138.

•

to define the maximum number of signals that can be recorded into the “alarm history” Warning. When the number of records stored on PC hard disk exceeded the maximum set one, the oldest signals are progressively overwritten by the new one.

•

to check and/or to change the default part of the GOSIP address (Government OSI Profile). Warning. The setting of this parameter is meaningful only if into the network there are some equipment that use the OSI communication protocol (Open System Interconnection).

•

to define the maximum option number into the “connection list” The “connection list” is the equipment list that the system displays at the choice of the arrow placed on the side of the Connect menu. Each option is coupled with the network identification of the equipment used to activate the connection at least one time. Warning. When the options into the list exceeds the maximum set number, the oldest options will be progressively overwritten by the new ones.

•

to delete the options present into the “connection list”

138

Because at the opening of the SCT/LMT window, the signals present into the Alarm history log area are the ones memorized into the disk of the PC.


209

Figure 44


If the box status is: •

deactivated (), the alarm/event signals are displayed into the Alarm history log area but they are not memorized into the disk of the PC. Warning. At the closing and new opening of the SCT/LMT window, such signals will not be present longer into the Alarm history log area.

•

activated (), into the PC hard disk and into the Alarm history log area, the system store and display the alarm/event signals.

To activate/deactivate the recording of the signals into the “alarm history” 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Into the General card, activate (or deactivate) the Store events on database box according to the operator’s. 3. Press Ok

210


To set the maximum number of signals that can be present into the “alarm history” 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Into the General card, move the Max records allowed cursor on the d esired value. Using the arrow keys of the keyboard, the value is increased (or decreased) with steps of 100. It is possible to set a value between 100 and 10000. 3. Press Ok

To check or to set the default part of the GOSIP address 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Into the General card, choose the Gosip address default settings push-button. The system displays the Gosip Default Option window. Warning. It is possible to change the values of all the parameters with the exception of the one relevant to the Sel parameter. 3. To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type into the relevant boxes the value of the corresponding byte/s. 4. To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. To add a value to the list: a. Press the Add push-button. The system opens the Domain Settings window. b. Type into the Label box, a name for the domain under examination. c. Type into the Hex value boxes, the value of the bytes that represent the domain. d. Press OK. To delete a value to the list: a. Select the value. b. Press the Remove push-button. 5. To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. To add or to delete a value to the list execute the same procedures pointed out for the Domain parameter. 6. Press Ok, into the Gosip Default Option window. 7. Press Ok, into the Options window.

To set the maximum number of voice of the “connection list” 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Into the History connection list area (General card) set the desired value using the arrow keys of the text box. It is possible to set a value between 1 and 50. 3. Press Ok


211

To erase the voice present into the “connection list” 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Into the General card, choose the Reset history push-button. The system displays the confirm window. 3. Press Yes.

5.7.2

Options - ‘’Connection’’ card


Disconnected, Connected/Monitor, Connected/Login Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System

The parameters present into the Connection card (shown in Figure 45) allow executing the following operations: •

to check and/or to change the connection type between the PC, on which it is installed the SCT/LMT program, and the equipment used as access point to the equipment network. For each connection type, it is available the Settings push-button. Such a push-button allows checking and/or changing some parameters relevant to the specific connection. Warning. It is not possible to change the connection type when it has been activated the connection between the program and the equipment. This feature prevents that the changes of the connection parameters can cause a malfunctioning of the connection itself.

•

to activate (and to d eactivate) the polling procedure When it is activated, the polling procedure consists of testing, every “t” seconds, the presence of the connection between the PC and the equipment. Such a procedure is a cyclic one, this means that, with a rotation, it is checked the presence of all the equipment (local e remote), with the exception of the ones disabled by the user (Disabled by user status ). Warning. If it has been deactivated the polling procedure, the system will automatically disconnect the users, coupled with a Timeout, at the end of the Timeout itself.

•

to activate (and to deactivate) the automatic re-connection procedure When it is activated, the automatic re-connection procedure consists of the automatic forwarding, every “t” seconds , of the connection command. This procedure is used only if the connected equipment interrupts the connection for every possible reason.

•

212

to check and/or to change the Timeout parameters of the PC. With details: −

the number of times that the PC has to retry the forwarding of a message before getting the absence of an answer as an error.

−

the time range that the PC has to wait before retrying again the forwarding of a message and before getting the absence of an answer as an error.


Figure 45


The option push-button: •

Connect using direct serial cable, has to be selected if the PC is physically connected with the equipment by means of a serial cable.

•

Connect using a modem, has to be selected when the PC is physically connected with the equipment by means of a modem.

•

Connect using local area network, has to be selected if the PC is physically connected with the equipment by means of a LAN network (Ethernet). Warning. It is not possible to change the setting of the option push-buttons when it has been activated the connection between the program and the equipment.

(2)

(3)

The box: •

Retries, points out the number of times that the PC has to retry the forwarding of a message, after having waited for “t” seconds (pointed out into the Timeout box ), before getting the absence of an answer as an error.

•

Timeout (Sec), points out the time range that the PC has to wait, before retrying again “n” times the forwarding of a message (pointed out into the Retries box ), before getting the absence of an answer as an error.

If the box status is: •

deactivated (), the procedure is deactivated.

•

activated (), the procedure is activated.


213

To change the type of connection between the PC and the equipment Warning. It is not possible to execute the following operation when it has been activated the connection between the program and the equipment. 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Bring at front the Connection card. 3. Select the desired option push-button (refer to Figure 45). Warning. Before selecting the Connect using direct serial cable push-button or Connect using a modem one, check that the Windows operating system is set as pointed out into the paragraph Installation. 4. If it has been selected the option push-button: •

Connect using direct serial cable it is possible, choosing the Settings push-button placed on the side, to check and/or to change the configuration parameters characteristic of the connection type under examination. The choice of the push-button opens the Edit Phonebook Entry window (for its description and using mode, refer to the help on line of Windows).

•

Connect using a modem it is possible, choosing the Settings push-button placed on the side, to check and/or to change the configuration parameters characteristic of the connection type under examination. The choice of the push-button opens the Modem Settings window. Into the Use the following entry for modem connection box, the system points out the modem connection type currently set. To check/change the configuration parameters, press the Properties push-button. The system displays the Edit Phonebook Entry window (for its description and using mode, refer to the help on line of Windows). To add a new modem connection press the Add push-button. The system displays the New Phonebook Entry Wizard window (for its description and using mode, refer to the help on line of Windows).

•

Connect using local area network and if it is available a MultiHomed Host PC (PC with more network cards), it is possible, choosing the Settings push-button placed on the side. The choice of the push-button opens the Available Host IP Address window, where the system points out the IP address of each network card present on the PC. Select the IP address that identifies the Network Manager (IP address of the card used for the Ethernet physical connection with the siae equipment) and press the OK push-button. The choice of a different IP address does not affect the connection with the equipment, but it could cause some troubles during the reception of the signals forwarded by the equipment.

5. Press Ok.

To activate/deactivate the polling procedure 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Bring at front the Connection card. 3. Activate (or deactivate) the Enable Polling box, according to the operator’s needing. 4. If the procedure has been activated, it is possible to set the time range (t) between one check and the next one. Selecting the arrows of the Interval (Sec) box, set a number between 1 and 50 seconds. 5. Press Ok.

214


To activate/deactivate the automatic re-connection procedure 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Bring at front the Connection card. 3. Activate (or deactivate) the Enable Autoreconnection box, according to the operator’s needing. 4. If the procedure has been activated, it is possible to set the time range between one reconnection attempt and the next one. Selecting the arrows of the Interval (Sec) box, set a number between 1 and 50 seconds. 5. Press Ok.

To set the timeout parameters of the PC 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Bring at front the Connection card. 3. To change the number of times that the PC has to retry the forwarding of a message, activate the Retries box and using the arrows, set a number between 0 and 5. 4. To change the time range that the PC has to wait, before re-trying again the forwarding of a message, activate the Timeout (Sec) box and using the arrows, set a number between 1 and 50 seconds. 5. Press Ok.

5.7.3

Options - ‘’Acknowledge’’ card



The parameters present into the Acknowledge card (shown in Figure 46) allow executing the following operations: •

activate/deactivate the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*) into the Station list area.

•

set the frequency to be used for the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*).

•

set the events that causes the flashing of the Acknowledge button and of the symbol (*).


215

Figure 46


If the box is: •

•

(2)

deactivated (), the program will not signal to the user, by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*), a generic status change of the boxes (, dwl, mop, tmo). activated (),the program will signal to the user, by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*), the status change of the boxes (, dwl, mop, tmo), present into the Station List area with the relevant box activated (refer to Blink when alarm area ).

Each box points out an event that causes (if the Blinking Enable box has been activated ) the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*). With details, the box: •

216

Warning, Minor, Major o Critical - is set, points out that the program will signal to the user the activation of the box (when the most serious alarm present into the equipment of a specific station has respectively the Warning, Minor, Major or Critical level) by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*) on the side of the name of the involved station.

•

Warning, Minor, Major o Critical - is cleared, points out that the program will signal to the user the deactivation of the box (when the most serious alarm present into the equipment of a specific station has respectively the Warning, Minor, Major or Critical level) by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*) on the side of the name of the involved station.

•

Download - is set, points out that the program will signal the activation of the dwl box by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*).

•

Download - is cleared , points out that the program will signal the deactivation of the dwl box by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*).


•

ManOp - is set, points out that the program will signal the activation of the mop box by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*).

•

ManOp - is cleared , points out that the program will signal the deactivation of the mop box by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*).

•

Timeout - is set, points out that the program will signal the activation of the tmo box by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*).

•

Timeout - is cleared , points out that the program will signal the deactivation of the tmo box by means of the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*).

To activate/deactivate the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*) 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Bring at front the Acknowledge card. 3. Activate (or deactivate) the Blinking Enable box according to the user’s needing (shown in Figure 46). 4. Press Ok.

To set the frequency to be used for the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*) 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Bring at front the Acknowledge card. 3. Move the cursor, present into the Blinking Frequency area, on the desired value. Warning. If the Blinking Enable box has been deactivated, the Blinking Frequency area is not available. 4. Press Ok.

To set the events that cause the flashing of the Acknowledge push-button and of the symbol (*) 1. Choose the Options command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Options window. 2. Bring at front the Acknowledge card. 3. Activate (or deactivate) the boxes present into the Blink when alarm: area according to the user’s needing (shown in Figure 46). Warning. If the Blinking Enable box has been deactivated, the Blink when alarm: area is not available. 4. Press Ok.


217

5.8

Tools menu

At the choice of Tools menu, the program displays the following commands: •

•

•

Equipment Configuration Wizard option. Such option allows saving, opening, displaying and transferring a configuration file. Subnetwork Configuration Wizard option. Such option allows managing the “remote equipment” list. Monitoring File Viewer option. It allows displaying the monitoring files (alarms and PM measurements) recorded through the Siae Alarm & Performance Monitoring program 139.

Warning. The other options present into such menu are reserved to the Siae Microelettronica operators for the execution of the maintenance operations of the program. If one of the above listed commands is not available, it means that the function coupled with it is not supported by the selected equipment type.

The Tools menu is always available. In fact, it is not affected by the status of the connection between the program and the equipment. Warning. The only exception are the reading/writing operations from/to the equipment (reading/transfer of the configuration, of the remote equipment list, etc.), such operations are available only when if has been activated the connection with the local equipment.

5.8.1

Tools - Equipment Configuration Wizard



Disconnected 140, Connected/Monitor Connected/Login Read only, Read and Write Station Operator, System

The Equipment Configuration Wizard command allows storing into a file: •

the configuration of an equipment (local and/or remote) connected with the program or a “virtual” configuration.

•

the configuration of the communication ports (IP Ethernet, PPP RS-232, etc.), of the routing tables, of the OSPF parameters of an equipment (local and/or remote) connected with the program or a “virtual” configuration. Warning. By the Equipment Configuration Wizard command , it is able to manage equipment, whose firmware/software manages the OSPF functionality of the 1.0.7 version. The version of the Equipment Configuration Wizard command is indicated in the right lower corner of the Equipment Configuration Wizard window.

139

The Alarm & Performance Monitoring program allows monitoring all the equipment connected with it and memorizing on a file the results of the PM measurements and the alarms/events. More detailed information concerning the program are reported on the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on-line guide/manual. 140

If it has not been activated the connection with any equipment, it will not be possible to execute the upload and download operations of the configuration.

218


Then, it will be possible to transfer the configuration (of equipment or of the communication ports) stored into the file to a generic equipment (local and/or remote). remote). The choice of the command, opens the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. With details, by means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following operations: •

to set a equipment “virtual” configuration or configuration or a communication ports “virtual” configuration. configuration. This operation consists of “creating”, starting from a standard configuration, the configuration configuration of an equipment that it is not really present into the network. Then, it will be possible to save the “virtual” configuration into a file (download) to one or more equipment of the same type.

•

141

or to transfer it

to open the configuration file of equipment equipment or the configuration file of the communication ports, por ts, previously memorized. Then the configuration file can be changed (if it is necessary), saved in a new file transfer it (download) to one or more equipment of the same type.

•

or to

to get (upload) the equipment configuration or communication ports configuration configuration of an equipment (local or remote) in connected status. Then the configuration can be changed (if it is necessary), saved in a file (download) to one or more equipment of the same type.

•

141

141

or to transfer it

to save on a file (backup) the entire configuration (configuration configuration (configuration data, communication data, remote equipment list) of an equipment (local or remote one) in connected status. Later, it will be possible to transfer (download) the entire configuration configuration to one or more equipment of the same type

Warning. These operations are available only for the Siae equipment: US (SDH radio), EL (PDH radio), PDH-AL (PDH radio) and ADM-C (SDH multiplex). multiplex).

It is possible to download on the equipment the entire configuration memorized in the file or only the desired options (subdivision groups of the parameters) and configuration parameters. Warning. To download a configuration to one or more equipment, it is necessary that the equipment is in connected/login status and that the user who has requested the login has the Station Operator or System user profile.

To set a “virtual” configuration of an equipment 1. Choose the Tools – Equipment Configuration Wizard command Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). window). The system displays the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. window. 2. Choose the File – Open - Open Configuration Template command. Template command. The system displays the Template Selection Selection window. window. 3. Select the the equipment equipment type type ( ….) for which the user user wants wants to create the the virtual virtual configuration. configuration. The system displays the selected equipment type into the below text box. 4. Press the OK push-button. OK push-button. Into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system points out the configuration parameters and the relevant default values coupled with the chosen equipment type, as it is shown into Figure 47. 47. 5. To change a parameter, click by means means of the mouse on the parameter itself. itself. The system displays a setting window.

141

The configuration files are saved with text format. It is possible to display the file contents opening the Equipment Configuration Wizard window or using every application program available in Windows that is able to detect the text format. Warning. In this second case, the file contents have never to be changed in any way.


219

The description of each single parameter is reported into the specific equipment help online/manual (LCT). 6. Choose the new value value and press OK. OK. The new value is pointed out into the Value column, the parameter status switches from

to

. 7. Repeat the operations operations pointed out at points 5 and 6 to change all the desired parameters. parameters. 8. Deactivate the the control boxes relevant to to the options not to be saved and/or transferred to the equipment.

142

and/or to the parameters that have

Warning. The deactivation of an option is a prioritary operation with respect to the setting of the parameters present into such an option. 9. To save the configuration configuration into a file, file, select the File – Save – Save File As command. The system displays the Save This Config File window. File window. 10.Type, into the proper box, the file name (with extension .cfg) and .cfg) and set the path where such a file has to be saved. It is possible to set the name of an already existing file, into the chosen path. Warning. In this case, if the file refers to an equipment of the same type, the data present into the file will be overwritten; on the contrary, it will not be possible to overwrite the file. 11.Choose the Save push-button. Save push-button. 12.To transfer the configuration to one or more equipment, select the Download - Configure Equipment As Current File command. File command. The system displays the Download configuration file window. file window. Into such a window, it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). For each equipment, in connected status (login and monitor), the system points out the following data: •

Into the the N.E. Label column: column: the network identification code. The wording (Local) (Local) points out the local equipment.

•

Into the Login the Login column: the equipment connection type. The wording: − −

Monitor, points Monitor, points out the connected/monitor connected/monitor status (identified also by the symbol symbol

).

System, Station Operator, Read and Write, points Write, points out the connected/login status (identified also by the symbol ). With details, each wording points out the profile of the user who has executed the login request.

Warning. A red square, present into the N.E. Label column column and eventually the Undefined label present into the Login Login column, point out that the equipment under examination is not in connected status. 13.Activate the control boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be transferred the new configuration. Warning. If the user wants to execute successfully the operation, he has to select one or more equipment that respect the following rules: •

they have to belong to the same type of the set configuration.

•

they have to be in connected/login status.

•

the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) must have Station Operator or System profile.

14.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the message “Downloading a configuration file may cause…. Do yo u want to proceed anyway?”. 15.Press Yes, Yes, to execute the operation. operation. Warning. Before executing the transfer operation of the parameters, the system executes a compatibility check between the configuration type to be transferred and the type of the equipment to which the data have to be transferred. If such configurations are compatible, the system starts the data transfer operation, on the contrary the operation is aborted

142

For instance. It the user deactivates the User Input option, at the saved and/or transfer operation of the configuration to the equipment, the system will not communicate the value of the parameters coupled with the Ul option, also if the box of the single parameters has been activated.

220


The system displays the Communication Status Status window. Into such a window, the system points out the following data: •

Dynamically into the Status filed , the , the status of the operation (Download ( Download in progress, Completed, etc). Completed, etc). Warning. If the user chooses the Abort push-button, Abort push-button, the system stops the operation.

•

Into the Errors area operation 144.

143

, the error messages relevant to the possible abort of the

At the end of the operation, into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, there is, for each parameter, the following graphical symbol: •

•

, if the download operation of the equipment value has been successfully executed. , if the download of the equipment value has not been successfully executed.

Warning. If the operator wants to wants to transfer the configuration of 1+0 system equipment to 1+1 system equipment or vice versa, versa, execute the following procedure: a. To execute the download as above described. The program automatically

displays

the

warning

message

because

the

equipment

restart

b. Re-connect the equipment c. To re-execute the download procedure.

143

Warning. The Errors area Errors area is displayed only if an error is detected.

144

Warning. For the Radio SDH equipment, the displaying of the messages “stm1J0PathTraceTx_STM1Radio: Set operation specified an invalid value or syntax” and “stm1J0PathTraceRx_STM1Radio: Set operation specified an invalid value or syntax”, syntax”, do not point out an error but a warning. These situations occur when the equipment to which it has been transferred the configuration has the Path Trace parameter Trace parameter disabled.


221

Figure 47


The: •

•

(2)

222

activated box (), points out that the option/parameter will be saved in file and/or downloaded to equipment. deactivated box (), points out that the option/parameter won’t be saved in file and/or downloaded to equipment.

Or name of the configuration file opened (refer (refer to relevant procedure). procedure).


To open an equipment configuration file, that has been previously saved 1. Choose the Tools – Equipment Configuration Wizard command Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). window). The system displays the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. window. 2. Choose the File – Open - Open File. File . The system displays the Select A Config File File window. window. 3. Select the desired file (with extension extension .cfg) .cfg).. 4. Press the Open push-button. Open push-button. Into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system system points points out the values of the configuration parameters memorized into the file (refer to Figure 47) 47). 5. To change a parameter, click by means means of the mouse on the parameter itself. itself. The system displays a setting window. The description of each single parameter is reported into the specific equipment help online/manual (LCT). 6. Choose the new value value and press OK. OK. The new value is pointed out into the Value column, the parameter status switches from

to

. 7. Repeat the operations pointed out at points 5 and 6 to change all the desired parameters. parameters. 8. Deactivate the the control boxes relevant to the the options not to be saved and/or transferred to the equipment.

142


Warning. The deactivation of an option is a prioritary operation with respect to the setting of the parameters present into such an option. 9. To save the configuration into the same file, select the File – Save – Save Current Changes command. Warning. The command is available if at least a value has been modified. 10.To save the configuration into a new file, select the File – Save – Save File As command. The system displays the Save This Config File window. File window. 11.Type, into the proper box, the file name (with extension .cfg) and .cfg) and set the path where such a file has to be saved. It is possible to set the name of an already existing file, into the chosen path. Warning. In this case, if the file refers to an equipment of the same type, the data present into the file will be overwritten; on the contrary, it will not be possible to overwrite the file. 12.Choose the Save push-button. Save push-button. 13.To transfer the configuration to one or more equipment, select the Download - Configure Equipment As Current File command. File command. The system displays the Download configuration file window. file window. Into such a window, it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). For each equipment, in connected status (login and monitor), the system points out the following data: •

Into the N.E. the N.E. Label column: column: the network identification code. The wording (Local) points (Local) points out the local equipment.

•

Into the Login the Login column: the equipment connection type. The wording: − −

Monitor, points Monitor, points out out the connected/monitor connected/monitor status (identified also by the symbol symbol

).

System, Station Operator, Read and Write, points Write, points out the connected/login status (identified also by the symbol ). With details, each wording points out the profile of the user who has executed the login request.

Warning. A red square, present into the N.E. Label column column and eventually eventually the Undefined label present into the Login Login column, point out that the equipment under examination is not in connected status.


223

14.Activate the control boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be transferred the new configuration. Warning. If the user wants to execute successfully the operation, he has to select one or more equipment that respect the following rules: •


•


•


15.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the message “Downloading a configuration file may cause…. Do yo u want to proceed anyway?”. 16.Press Yes to execute the operation. Warning. Before executing the transfer operation of the parameters, the system executes a compatibility check between the configuration type to be transferred and the type of the equipment to which the data have to be transferred. If such configurations are compatible, the system starts the data transfer operation, on the contrary the operation is aborted The system displays the Communication Status window. Into such a window, the system points out the following data: •

Dynamically into the Status filed , the status of the operation (Download in progress, Completed, etc). Warning. If the user chooses the Abort push-button, the system stops the operation.

•


143



•


Warning. If the operator wants to transfer the configuration of 1+0 system equipment to 1+1 system equipment or vice versa, execute the following procedure: a. To execute the download as above described. The program automatically

displays

the

warning

message

because

the

equipment

restart


To get (upload) the configuration of an equipment 1. Choose the Tools – Equipment Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. 2. Create a new virtual configuration (Open Configuration Template) or open an existing configuration file (Open File). Warning. The virtual configuration or the configuration file must be of the same type of the equipment with the configuration to be uploaded. Into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system points out the configuration parameters (refer to Figure 47). Warning. The check boxes status (activated or deactivated) of the options/parameters are not considered during the equipment configuration upload. The operation uploads all parameters. 3. Select the Upload – Get Current Type Configuration From Equipment command.

224


The system displays the Upload configuration file window, where it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). On the side of the name of every equipment, there is a square. If the square color is: •

green, it points out that the equipment is in connected status (login or monitor)

•

red, it points out that the equipment is not in connected status.

4. Select the equipment in connected status, with the configuration to be uploaded. It is possible to select a single equipment at a time. 5. Choose OK. The system displays the Communication Status window. Into such a window, the system points out the following data: •


•

Into the Errors area operation.

143


At the end of the operation, into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system points out the values of the configuration parameters relevant to the equipment. For each parameter, there is the following graphical symbol: •

•

, if the upload of the equipment value has been successfully executed. , if the upload of the equipment value has not been successfully executed.

6. To change a parameter, click by means of the mouse on the parameter itself. The system displays a setting window. The description of each single parameter is reported into the specific equipment help online/manual (LCT). 7. Choose the new value and press OK. The new value is pointed out into the Value column, the parameter status switches from

to

. 8. Repeat the operation pointed out at the points 6, 7 to change all the desired parameters. 9. Deactivate the control boxes relevant to the options not to be saved and/or transferred to the equipment.

142


Warning. The deactivation of an option is a prioritary operation with respect to the setting of the parameters present into such an option. 10.To save the configuration into the same file, select the File – Save – Save Current Changes command. Warning. The command is available if at least a value has been modified. 11.To save the configuration into a new file, select the File – Save – Save File As command. The system displays the Save This Config File window. 12.Type, into the proper box, the file name (with extension .cfg) and set the path where such a file has to be saved. It is possible to set the name of an already existing file, into the chosen path. Warning. In this case, if the file refers to an equipment of the same type, the data present into the file will be overwritten; on the contrary, it will not be possible to overwrite the file. 13.Choose the Save push-button. 14.To transfer the configuration to one or more equipment, select the Download – Configure Equipment As Current File command. The system displays the Download configuration file window. Into such a window, it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). For each equipment, in connected status (login and monitor), the system points out the following data: •

Into the N.E. Label column: the network identification code. The wording (Local) points out the local equipment.

•

Into the Login column: the equipment connection type.


225

The wording: − −

Monitor, points out the connected/monitor status (identified also by the symbol

).

System, Station Operator, Read and Write, points out the connected/login status (identified also by the symbol ). With details, each wording points out the profile of the user who has executed the login request.

Warning. A red square, present into the N.E. Label column and eventually the Undefined label present into the Login column, point out that the equipment under examination is not in connected status. 15.Activate the control boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be transferred the new configuration. Warning. If the user wants to execute successfully the operation, he has to select one or more equipment that respect the following rules: •


•


•


16.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the message “Downloading a configuration file may cause…. Do yo u want to proceed anyway?”. 17.Press Yes to execute the operation. Warning. Before executing the transfer operation of the parameters, the system executes a compatibility check between the configuration type to be transferred and the type of the equipment to which the data have to be transferred. If such configurations are compatible, the system starts the data transfer operation, on the contrary the operation is aborted

The system displays the Communication Status window. Into such a window, the system points out the following data: •


•


143



•



displays

the

warning

message

because

the

equipment

restart


To set a communication port “virtual” configuration 1. Choose the Tools – Equipment Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Equipment Configuration Wizard window.

226


2. Choose the File – Open - Open Address Configuration Template command. Into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system points out the configuration parameters and the relevant default values of Siae equipment, as it is shown into Figure 48. 3. To change a parameter, click by means of the mouse on the parameter itself. The system displays a setting window

145

.

4. Choose the new value and press OK. The new value is pointed out into the Value column, the parameter status switches from

to

. 5. Repeat the operations pointed out at points 3 and 4 to change all the desired parameters. 6. If the user has selected the Routing Table parameter (routing table “Running”) it is possible: •

to set the d efault gateway IP address, in the following way: a. Select the Edit –Add Default Gateway command. The system displays the Select Target Equipment window. Warning. The window is not displayed if the type of equipment/protocol has been already set during the setting of a previous parameter. In this case, continue the procedure from step d. b. Select the equipment type/communication protocol for which it has to b e set the parameter under examination. Warning. If an equipment type managed by OSI protocol is selected, the setting of the OSPF… parameters will be meaningless. c. Press OK push-button. The system displays the Add Default Gateway window. d. Set the desired values and press Add

146

.

The system displays the parameter into the right area of the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. •

to set one element of the routing table, in the following way: a. Select the Edit - Add Element command. The system displays the Select Target Equipment window. Warning. The window is not displayed if the type of equipment/protocol has been already set during the setting of a previous parameter. In this case, continue the procedure from step d. b. Select the equipment type/communication protocol for which it has to b e set the parameter under examination. Warning. If the user selects an equipment type managed with OSI protocol, the setting of the OSPF… parameters will not be a significant one. c. Press OK push-button. The system displays the Add Routing Table Element window. d. Set the desired values and press Add

146

.

Warning. The value assigned to the Route Destination parameter can not be changed later on.

145

For the description and the setting mode o f the parameters of the: • •

Equipment Properties option, refer to Properties paragraph. IP Ethernet, PPP RS232, LCT PPP, PPP Radio/2Mb, PPP-AggWest, PPP-AggEast, IP Over OSI, RadioSDH-QECC, ADM-QECC, PMP-IPBox options, refer to Port Configuration paragraph.

•

Permanent Login option, refer to User Manager paragraph.

•

Routing Table option, refer to Routing Table paragraph.

•

Off Line Routing Table option, refer to Stored Routing Table paragraph.

•

OSPF Properties, OSPF Areas, OSPF IFs/Metrics, Summarization options, refer to OSPF paragraph.

OSPF

Virtual

links,

OSPF

Route

146

For the description and the setting mode of the parameters refer to Stored Routing Table paragraph.


227

The system displays the new element into the right area of the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. •

to change the default gateway address or an element of the routing table, in the following way: a. Click on the parameter, into the right area of the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. The system displays a setting window. b. Type the new value and press OK. Warning. It is not possible to insert/change the default gateway address, if it is already present a valid IP default gateway value (value different from 0.0.0.0). Warning. It is not possible to change the Route Destination parameter.

•

to delete an element of the routing table, in the fo llowing way: a. Select the parameter into the right area of the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. b. Choose the Edit - Remove Element command.

7. If it has been selected the Off Line Routing Table parameter (“Stored” routing table), it is possible: •

to set the IP address of default gateway

•

to set an element of the routing table

•

to change the address of default gateway or an element of the routing table

•

to delete an element of the routing table

8. If it has been selected the OSPF Areas parameter it is possible: •

to create a new area, in the following way: a. Choose the Edit – Add OSPF Element command. The system displays the OSPF Add Area window. b. Set the desired values and press Ok

147

.


to delete an area, in the following way: a. Click on the parameter, into the right area of the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. b. Choose the Edit –Remove OSPF Element command.

9. If the OSPF IFs/Metrics has been selected, the Select Target Equipment window opens. Warning. The window is not displayed if the type of equipment/protocol has been already set during the setting of a previous parameter. In this case, continue the procedure from step d. Warning. If, during the setting of a previous parameter, a equipment managed by protocol OSI has been selected, the setting of OSPF… parameters is meaningless. 10.If it has been selected the OSPF Virtual Links parameter it is possible: •

to create a new virtual link, in the following way: a. Choose the Edit – Add OSPF Element command. The system displays the OSPF Add Virtual Link window. b. Set the desired values and press Ok

147

.


to delete a virtual link, in the following way: a. Click on the virtual link, into the right area of the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. b. Choose the Edit –Remove OSPF Element command.

147

For the description and the setting mode of the parameters refer to OSPF paragraph.

228


11.If it has been selected the OSPF Route Summarization parameter it is possible: •

to create a new route summarization, in the following way: a. Choose the Edit – Add OSPF Element command. The system displays the OSPF Add Aggregate window. b. Set the desired values and press Ok

147

.


to delete a ro ute summarization, in the following way: a. Click on the route summarization, into the right area of the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. b. Choose the Edit –Remove OSPF Element command.

12.Deactivate the control boxes relevant to the options not to be saved and/or transferred to the equipment.

148


Warning. The deactivation of an option is a prioritary operation with respect to the setting of the parameters present into such an option. 13.To save the configuration into a file, select the File – Save – Save File As command. The system displays the Save This Config File window. 14.Type, into the proper box, the file name (with extension .cfg) and set the path where such a file has to be saved. It is possible to set the name of an already existing file, into the chosen path. Warning. In this case the data present into the file will be overwritten. 15.Choose the Save push-button. 16.To transfer the configuration to one or more equipment, select the Download - Configure Equipment As Current File command. The system displays the Download configuration file window. Into such a window, it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). For each equipment, in connected status (login and monitor), the system points out the following data: •


•

Into the Login column: the equipment connection type. The wording: −


).

−


Warning. A red square, present into the N.E. Label column and eventually the Undefined label present into the Login column, point out that the equipment under examination is not in connected status. 17.Activate the control boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be transferred the new configuration. Warning. If the user wants to execute successfully the operation, he has to select one or more equipment that respect the following rules: • •

they have to be in connected/login status. the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) must have Station Operator or System profile.

18.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the Download Type Selection window.

148

For instance. It the user deactivates the IP Ethernet option, at the saved and/or transfer operation of the configuration to the equipment, the system will not communicate the value of the parameters coupled with the IP Ethernet option, also if the box of the single parameters has been activated.


229

19.Activate the control box: •

"Standard (IP/Communication/OSPF) settings", to download the parameters of the communication ports (IP address, IP NetMask, OSPF parameters, etc.). Warning. After the configuration download the equipment has to restarted in order to activate the new IP parameters.

•

"Routing Table" , to download the element of the routing table.

20.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the File download window. Into such a window, the system points out the change values and the possible consequences of download. 21.Press Yes, to execute the operation. The system displays the Communication Status window. Into such a window, the system points out the following data: •


•


143



•


Warning. During the download operation of the routing table, the system will transfer only the following elements: •

the new elements: the elements not present into the routing table memorized into the equipment.

•

the elements already present into the routing table of the equipment, for which it has been changed at least one parameter.

The deleting of an element present into the routing table is not communicated to the equipment, because the download operation is not a data overwriting operation but a data adding one. To delete an element present into the routing table of an equipment, use the commands present into the Routing Table window (routing table “Running”) or into the Stored Routing Table window (routing table “Stored”). During the download of OSPF parameters, if the OSPF process of the equipment is active, it is de-activated. At the end of operation, if the OSPFAdminStat 149 parameter has been downloaded, the OSPF process of the equipment is activated/deactivated according to the parameter setting, otherwise it comes back to the status before the download. Warning. If the operator changes the value of one or more IP Address and/or NetMask of the ports execute the following procedure: a. To execute the download as above described. b. To reset the equipment c. To re-execute the download procedure. The re-execute of the download with the update IP address to assure the correct configuration of the OSPF p arameters.

149

230

OSPFAdminStat : parameter that determined the enabling status of OSPF process.


Figure 48


The: •

•

activated box (), points out that the option/parameter will be saved in file and/or downloaded to equipment. deactivated box (), points out that the option/parameter won’t be saved in file and/or downloaded to equipment.

Warning. After an upload operation, the system displays the IP Over OSI parameter only if the involved equipment is inserted into an OSI network 150.

150

The OSI network is a network where it is used also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol as communication protocol between the network elements.


231

To open the configuration file of the communication port, that has been previously saved 1. Choose the Tools – Equipment Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. 2. Choose the File – Open - Open File. The system displays the Select A Config File window. 3. Select the desired file (with extension .cfg). 4. Press the Open push-button. Into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system points out the values of the configuration parameters memorized into the file (refer to Figure 48). 5. To change a parameter, click by means of the mouse on the parameter itself. The system displays a setting window

145

.


to



•


•


•


9. If the user has selected the Off Line Routing Table parameter (routing table “Stored”) it is possible: •


•


•


•


10.If the user has selected the OSPF Areas parameter it is possible: •


•

to delete an area

11.If the user has selected the OSPF IFs/Metrics parameter, the Select Target Equipment window is displayed. Warning. The window is not displayed if the type of equipment/protocol has been already set during the setting of a previous parameter. In this case, continue the procedure from step d. Warning. If, during the setting of a previous parameter, a equipment managed by protocol OSI has been selected, the setting of OSPF… parameters is meaningless. 12.If the user has selected the OSPF Virtual Links parameter it is possible: •


•

to delete a virtual link

13.If the user has selected the OSPF Route Summarization parameter it is possible: •

to create a new route summarization

•

to delete a route summarization

14.Deactivate the control boxes relevant to the options to be saved and/or transferred to the equipment.

232

148

and/or parameters that have not


Warning. The deactivation of an option is a prioritary operation with respect to the setting of the parameters present into such an option. 15.To save the configuration into the same file, select the File – Save – Save Current Changes command. Warning. The command is available if at least a value has been modified. 16.To save the configuration into a new file, select the File – Save – Save File As command. The system displays the Save This Config File window. 17.Type, into the proper box, the file name (with extension .cfg) and set the path where such a file has to be saved. It is possible to set the name of an already existing file, into the chosen path. Warning. In this case the data present into the file will be overwritten. 18.Choose the Save push-button 19.To transfer the configuration to one or more equipment, select the Download – Configure Equipment As Current File command. The system displays the Download configuration file window. Into such a window, it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). For each equipment, in connected status (login and monitor), the system points out the following data: •


•



).

−


Warning. A red square, present into the N.E. Label column and eventually the Undefined label present into the Login column, point out that the equipment under examination is not in connected status. 20.Activate the control boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be transferred the new configuration. Warning. If the user wants to execute successfully the operation, he has to select one or more equipment that respect the following rules: •


•


21.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the Download Type Selection window. 22.Activate the control box: •

"Standard (IP/Communication/OSPF) settings", to download the parameters of the communication ports (IP address, IP NetMask, OSPF parameters, etc.). Warning. After the configuration download the equipment has to restarted in order to activate the new IP parameters.

•


23.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the File download window. Into such a window, the system points out the change values and the possible consequences of download. 24.Press Yes, to execute the operation. The system displays the Communication Status window. Into such a window, the system points out the following data: •


•



143


233


•



•

the new elements: the elements not present into the routing table memorized into the equipment. the elements already present into the routing table of the equipment, for which it has been changed at least one parameter.

The deleting of an element present into the routing table is not communicated to the equipment, because the download operation is not a data overwriting operation but a data adding one. To delete an element present into the routing table of an equipment, use the commands present into the Routing Table window (routing table “Running”) or into the Stored Routing Table window (routing table “Stored”). During the download of the OSPF parameters, if the OSPF process o f the equipment is active, it is deactivated. At the end of operation, if the OSPFAdminStat 149 parameter has been downloaded, the OSPF process of the equipment is activated/deactivated according to the parameter setting, otherwise it comes back to the state before the download. Warning. If the operator changes the value of one or more IP Address and/or NetMask of the ports execute the following procedure: a. To execute the download as above described. b. To reset the equipment c. To re-execute the download procedure. The re-execute of the download with the update IP address to assure the correct configuration of the OSPF parameters.

To get (upload) the configuration of the communication ports 1. Choose the Tools – Equipment Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. 2. Create a new virtual configuration (Open Address Configuration Template) or open an existing configuration file (Open File). Into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system points out the configuration parameters (refer to Figure 48). Warning. The check boxes status (activated or deactivated) of the options/parameters are not considered during the configuration upload. The operation uploads all parameters. 3. Select the Upload – Get Current Type Configuration From Equipment menu. The system displays the Upload configuration file window, where it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). On the side of the name of every equipment, there is a square. If the square color is: •

green, it points out that the equipment is in connected status (login o r monitor)

•


4. Select the equipment in connected status, with the configuration to be uploaded. It is possible to select a single equipment at a time. 5. Choose OK. The system displays the Communication Status window. Into such a window, the system points out the following data:

234


•


•


143


Warning. The message “Warning unable to get OSPF property ospfRouterId (disabled)” indicates that the OSPF parameters have not been acquired as the OSPF process of the equipment is deactivated or the equipment firmware does not support the OSPF functionality. At the end of the operation, into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system points out the values of the configuration parameters relevant to the equipment. For each parameter, there is the following graphical symbol: •

•

, if the upload of the equipment value has been successfully executed. , if the upload of the equipment value has not been successfully executed.

Warning. During the upload operation of the routing table, the system will get only the elements that has been manually inserted by the operator and not the ones automatically set by the equipment at its initialisation (start-up operation). Then, the system gets the elements of the “Stored” routing table only if the selected equipment is in login connected status and the user who has requested the login has the System profile. 6. To change a parameter, click by means of the mouse on the parameter itself. The system displays a setting window

145

.


to



•


•


•


10.If the user has selected the Off Line Routing Table parameter (routing table “Stored”) it is possible: •


•


•


•


11.If the user has selected the OSPF Areas parameter it is possible: •


•

to delete an area

12.If the user has selected the OSPF IFs/Metrics parameter, the Select Target Equipment window is displayed. Warning. The window is not displayed if the type of equipment/protocol has been already set during the setting of a previous parameter. In this case, continue the procedure from step d. Warning. If, during the setting of a previous parameter, a equipment managed by protocol OSI has been selected, the setting of OSPF… parameters is meaningless. 13.If the user has selected the OSPF Virtual Links parameter it is possible: •


•

to delete a virtual link

14.If the user has selected the OSPF Route Summarization parameter it is possible:


235

•

to create a new route summarization

•

to delete a route summarization

15.Deactivate the control boxes relevant to the options not to be saved and/or transferred to the equipment.

148


Warning. The deactivation of an option is a prioritary operation with respect to the setting of the parameters present into such an option. 16.To save the configuration into the same file, select the File – Save – Save Current Changes command. Warning. The command is available if at least a value has been modified. 17.To save the configuration into a new file, select the File – Save – Save File As command. The system displays the Save This Config File window. 18.Type, into the proper box, the file name (with extension .cfg) and set the path where such a file has to be saved. It is possible to set the name of an already existing file, into the chosen path. Warning. In this case the d ata present into the file will be overwritten. 19.Choose the Save push-button. 20.To transfer the configuration to one or more equipment, select the Download – Configure Equipment As Current File command. The system displays the Download configuration file window. Into such a window, it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). For each equipment, in connected status (login and monitor), the system points out the following data: •


•



).

−


Warning. A red square, present into the N.E. Label column and eventually the Undefined label present into the Login column, point out that the equipment under examination is not in connected status. 21.Activate the control boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be transferred the new configuration. Warning. If the user wants to execute successfully the operation, he has to select one or more equipment that respect the following rules: • •

they have to be in connected/login status. the user who has requested the login (of each equipment) must have Station Operator or System profile.

22.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the Download Type Selection window. 23.Activate the control box: •

“Standard (IP/Communication/OSPF) settings”, to download the parameters of the communication ports (IP address, IP NetMask, OSPF parameters, etc.). Warning. After the configuration download the equipment has to restarted in order to activate the new IP parameters.

•


24.Select the OK push-button. The system displays the File download window. Into such a window, the system points out the change values and the possible consequences of download. 25.Press Yes, to execute the operation. The system displays the Communication Status window. Into such a window, the system points out the following data:

236


•


•


143



•



the new elements: the elements not present into the routing table memorized into the equipment.

•

the elements already present into the routing table of the equipment, for which it has been changed at least one parameter.

The deleting of an element present into the routing table is not communicated to the equipment, because the download operation is not a data overwriting operation but a data adding one. To delete an element present into the routing table of an equipment, use the commands present into the Routing Table window (routing table “Running”) or into the Stored Routing Table window (routing table “Stored”). During the download of the OSPF parameters, if the OSPF process of the equipment is active, it is deactivated. At the end of operation, if the OSPFAdminStat 149 parameter has been downloaded, the OSPF process of the equipment is activated/deactivated according to the parameter setting, otherwise it comes back to the state before the download. Warning. If the operator changes the value of one or more IP Address and/or NetMask of the ports execute the following procedure: a. To execute the download as above described. b. To reset the equipment c. To re-execute the download procedure. The re-execute of the download with the update IP address to assure the correct configuration of the OSPF p arameters.

To save into a file (backup) the entire configuration of an (configuration data, communication data, remote equipment list)

equipment

1. Choose the Tools – Equipment Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. 2. Choose the Upload – Backup Full Equipment Configuration command. The system displays the Template Selection window. 3. Select the equipment type ( ….) for which the user wants to save the all configuration (MIB). The system displays the selected equipment type into the below text box. 4. Press the OK push-button. The system displays an additional Equipment Configuration Wizard window and, later, the Upload Configuration File window that lists the equipment (local and remote ones). On the side of the name of every equipment, there is a square. If the square color is: •

green, it points out that the equipment is in connected status (login or monitor)

•


5. Select the equipment in connected status for which it has to be get the entire configuration. It is possible to select a single equipment at a time.


237

6. Choose OK. The system displays the Save Backup As window. 7. Type, into the proper box, the file name (with extension .bku) and set the path where such a file has to be saved It is possible to set the name of an already existing file, into the chosen path. Warning. In this case, if the file refers to an equipment of the same type, the data present into the file will be overwritten; on the contrary, it will not be possible to overwrite the file. 8. Choose the Save push-button. Into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window, the system points out the operations executed by the program fo r the saving of the file and their results. The wording Done! points out the end of the operation. Warning. Choosing the Abort push-button, the operation stops.

To transfer (download) the entire configuration to one or more equipment of the same type 1. Choose the Tools – Equipment Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Equipment Configuration Wizard window. 2. Choose the Download – Restore Full Equipment Configuration command. The system displays an additional Equipment Configuration Wizard and, later, the Select Backup File window. 3. Select the desired file (with extension .bku). 4. Press the Open push-button. The system displays the Download configuration file window. Into such a window, it is pointed out the list of the equipment (local and remote). For each equipment, in connected status (login and monitor), the system points out the following data: •


•

Into the Login column: the equipment connection type. The wording: − −


).


Warning. A red square, present into the N.E. Label column and eventually the Undefined label present into the Login column, point out that the equipment under examination is not in connected status. 5. Activate the control boxes relevant to the equipment to which it has to be transferred the new configuration. Warning. If the user wants to execute successfully the operation, he has to select one or more equipment that respect the following rules: •


•


6. Select the OK push-button. Into the Equipment Configuration Wizard window , the system points out the operations executed by the program for the file transfer and their results. The wording Done! Points out the end of the operation. Warning. Choosing the Abort push-button, the operation stops. Warning. At the end of the operation, the message “ Restart the equipment to apply changes” is displayed, warning that it is necessary to reset the equipment to make the modifications to the configuration effective.

238



displays

the

warning

message

because

the

equipment

restart

b. Re-connect the equipment c. To re-execute the download procedure. Warning. If the operator changes the value of one or more IP Address and/or NetMask of the ports execute the following procedure: a. To execute the download as above described. b. To reset the equipment c. To re-execute the download procedure. The re-execute of the download with the update IP address to assure the correct configuration of the OSPF p arameters.

5.8.2

Tools - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard



Disconnected 151, Connected/Monitor Connected/Login Read only, Read and Write Station Operator, System

The Subnetwork Configuration Wizard option allows checking and eventually changing the “remote equipment list” stored into the controller of the local equipment or of a generic remote equipment in connected/login status and with System or Station Operator user profile 152.

The “remote equipment list” is a list that contains all the remote equipment relevant to the network to be connected. For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the program will display, into the Equipment list area, only the detail of the equipment coupled with such a specific station. The functional status of the other equipment present into the “remote equipment” list connected with the program is pointed out by the resuming boxes of the station that contain the equipment (refer to Station list area). Warning. The station does not have any particular meaning; it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.

151

If it has not been activated the connection with any equipment, the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window will be empty. 152

Warning. The ELFO equipment are not provided with the list of the remote equipment. Then, for such equipment, the check, change, updating, etc. operations, relevant to the list of the remote equipment memorized into the equipment, are not available. If the user wants using as local equipment an ELFO one, to display the remote equipment, it is necessary to save the list of the remote equipment on a file and later to use the file during the connection with the ELFO local equipment.


239

When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment), at the connection of such an equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads its “remote equipment list” and automatically forwards the connection command to all the equipment present into the list. The user can save the “remote equipment” list into a file and use such a list at the connection of the equipment and not the one stored into the equipment (refer to the connection procedure). In such a way, the program displays, into the Station list area, all the stations that group the equipment and, into the Equipment list area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the connection request of the program will result in connected/monitor status 153. Warning. The “remote equipment list” has to be set by the SCT/LMT user. Besides the remote equipment to be connected, the user can insert into the “remote equipment list” also the following information: • •

The IP address of the Element Manager (for instance the Siae NMS5UX supervisory system). The coupling between IP address and Gosip one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

Warning. Into the “remote equipment list” of a specific equipment, the presence of the abovementioned elements will no be pointed out into the Equipment list area, at the activation of the connection with the specific equipment.

At the choice of the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard option , the program opens the window shown in Figure 49. By means of the options present into the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window , the user can: •

set or change the “remote equipment list”. With details, it is possible to execute the following operations: −

to add, to rename and to remove a station

−

to add, to change, to remove and to move an equipment inside the list

−

to clear the “r emote equipment” list present into the New Configuration area.

The user can set and communicate the same list to more equipment at the same time

152

.

Into each “remote equipment” list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station. Warning. The LMT graphical interface manages 2 equipment only. This means that if the user is using the LMT interface at the activation of the connection with an equipment (local equipment), the program will automatically activate the connection with only one remote equipment, also if the “remote equipment” list of the local equipment contains more than 2 equipment. For this reason, for the users of the LMT interface only, it is advisable to set “remote equipment” lists composed by 1 equipment only. •

check the “remote equipment list” currently stored into an equipment

•

save and then restore from a file the “remote equipment list”.

152

Warning. The “remote equipment list” stored into the file can be used later by the program during the connection with an equipment. •

remove the “remote equipment list” of one or more equipment 152

153

The program will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered to the connection request, until to:

240

•

It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.

•

The user disables the equipment.

•

The equipment is deleted from the “remote equipment list” of the local equipment.


Figure 49


241


For every station (symbol name of the station 154.

), the program points out, into the Station/… column, the

Warning. The stations are displayed (into both areas) with the same order used for the insertion into the “remote equipment” list. (2)

For each equipment, the program points out: •

…/Equipment equipment.

Name. Network and connection status identification code of the

The user assigns the network identification code by means of the Properties op tion. The connection status of the equipment is represented by the following symbols: −

−

−

, equipment in connected/login status with System or Station Operator user profile 155. , equipment in connected/monitor or connected/login status with Read only or Read and Write user profile 155. , equipment in disconnected status.

Warning. Remember that it is always possible to set or to change the “remote equipment list” memorized into the controller of the equipment (local or remote one) in connected/login status with System or Station Operator user profile (symbol ). •

IP Address IP address (agent SNMP) of the equipment.

•

Operation. The wording OK points out that the last executed operation has been successfully ended. If the operation fails, the program keeps open the Processing Status window (the program opened such a window during the execution of the operation), showing the causes of the failure relevant to the operation itself.

•

Login. Login/monitor status of the equipment, then, in login status, the program points out the profile of the user who has executed the request. With details, the wording: −

Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator or System, points out that the equipment is in connected/login status and that the user who has requested the login has respectively a Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator type profile or a System type one.

−

Monitor, points out that the equipment is in connected/monitor status.

The wording (Local) points out the local equipment. (3)

(4)

The choice of the Refresh push-button allows updating the information present into the Actual Configuration area. For each equipment (symbol •

), the program points out, into the:

…/Equipment Name column, the name of the equipment into the “remote equipment list” 156.

•

IP Address column, the IP address (agent SNMP) of the equipment.

•

Element Type column, the equipment type. The wording: −

Managed by SCT, points out a Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program.

−

Remote link, points out a Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program that constitutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection.

−

Element Manager , points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for instance the Siae NMS5UX supervisory system).

154

The user assigns the name of the station during the creation of the station itself.

155

The system points out the profile of the user who has requested the login into the Login column.

156

The program automatically assigns the equipment name during the creation of the equipment itself (Equipment…). Warning. The program does not point out the name of the equipment, present into the “remote equipment” list, into the Equipment List area. Into such an area, the program points out the network identification code of the equipment, assigned by the user by means of the Properties option.

242


−

•

Not Managed, points out an element not managed by the SCT/LMT program. This option can be used to insert into the “remote equipment list” some information as for instance the coupling between the IP address and the Gosip one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

Gosip Address. Gosip address (Government OSI Profile). This parameter is present only if the record refers to an equipment inserted into an OSI network 157.

(5)

Into the New Configuration area, it is possible to display the “remote equipment” list read by a single equipment at a time.

(6)

The program displays these push-buttons as an alternative to other ones according to the type of record that has been selected into the New Configuration area. With details, if it has been selected: •

A station (

), there are the Remove Station and Rename Station push-buttons.

•

An equipment ( ),there are the Remove Element and Modify Element pushbuttons.

To set the “remote equipment list” 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Set the desired “remote equipment list” using the following procedures: •

to add a station

•

to rename a station

•

to remove a station

•

to add an equipment Warning. It is not possible to create an equipment, if it has not been created before the station to which such an equipment has to be connected.

•

to change an equipment

•

to move an equipment into the list

•

to remove an equipment

•

to clear the “r emote equipment” list present into the New Configuration area

Warning. It is advisable to insert, into every list, also the equipment to which the system is forwarding the list. This information needs for defining the station where it is present the equipment. On the contrary, at the activation of the connection with such an equipment, it will result inserted into the Undefined station. 3. Into the Actual Configuration area , activate the control box relevant to the equipment to which the new “remote equipment list” has to be communicated 152. The user can activate as many bo xes as he wants. At the activation of the box relevant to a station, the system will automatically activate the boxes of the equipment coupled with the station in connected/login status. Warning. To forward the “remote equipment list”, it is necessary for the selected equipment to be in connected/login status and the user who has requested for the login (of every equipment) must have the System or Station Operator profile (refer to Figure 49 - symbol )158. 4. Select the Send push-button. The program displays a confirmation window. 5. Choose the Proceed to download? Push-button.

157

The OSI network is a network that uses, as communication protocol between the network elements, also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol. 158

To change the equipment status from connected/monitor to connected/login, use the options of the Login menu.


243

Warning. Through this operation, the program replaces the “remote equipment list” stored into the equipment, with the activated box, with the new list. The program displays the Processing Status window that points out the executed percentage of the operation. If the user presses the Show Report push-button, the program expands the Processing Status window showing the details of the operation on progress 159. At the end, the program points out, into the Operation column , the operation result. If the operation fails, the program keeps open the Processing Status window, showing the causes of the operation failure. Warning. The change of the “remote equipment list” relevant to the local equipment affects the equipment list pointed out into the Actual Configuration area , and the ones pointed out into the Station list and Equipment list areas. If it has been changed the list of the local equipment, it is possible that the system displays the message WARNING. The local equipment is not present in Remote Element List . Probable cause:…. Such a message warns that into the list it was absent the local equipment and points out the possible causes. If into a list, the user does not insert also the equipment to which the system is forwarding the list itself, at the next activation of the connection with such an equipment, it will result inserted into the Undefined station.

To change the “remote equipment list” 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Open the “remote equipment” list to be changed: •

list saved into a file

•

list stored into the controller of an equipment

3. Change the list using the following procedures: •

to add a station

•

to rename a station

•

to remove a station

•

to add an equipment Warning. It is not possible to create an equipment, if it has not been created before the station to which such an equipment has to be connected.

•

to change an equipment

•

to move an equipment into the list

•

to remove an equipment

•

to clear the “remote equipment” list present into the New Configuration area

Warning. It is advisable to insert, into every list, also the equipment to which the system is forwarding the list. This information needs for defining the station where it is present the equipment. On the contrary, at the activation of the connection with such an equipment, it will result inserted into the Undefined station.

159

With details, the wording: • Retrieving List – points out that the reading of the list stored into the equipment is on progress. • Writing List – points out that the forwarding of the new list to the equipment is on p rogress. • Erasing List – points out that the deleting of the list stored into the equipment is on progress. • Writing… - points out that the data forwarding (Ip Address, Gosip Address, etc.) to the equipment is on progress. • Processing Terminated - points out that the operation has been ended.

The wording …OK points out that the specific operation has been successfully ended.

244


4. Into the Actual Configuration area , activate the control box relevant to the equipment to which the “remote equipment list” has to be communicated 152. The user can activate as many bo xes as he wants. At the activation of the box relevant to a station, the system will automatically activate the boxes of the equipment coupled with the station in connected/login status. Warning. To forward the “remote equipment list”, it is necessary for the selected equipment to be in connected/login status and the user who has requested for the login (of every equipment) must have the System or Station Operator profile (refer to Figure 49 - symbol ) 158 . 5. Select the Send push-button. The program displays a confirmation window. 6. Choose the Proceed to download? Push-button. Warning. Through this operation, the program replaces the “remote equipment list” stored into the equipment, with the activated box, with the new list. The program displays the Processing Status window that points out the executed percentage of the operation. If the user presses the Show Report push-button, the program expands the Processing Status window showing the details of the operation on progress 159. At the end, the program points out, into the Operation column , the operation result. If the operation fails, the program keeps open the Processing Status window, showing the causes of the operation failure. Warning. The change of the “remote equipment list” relevant to the local equipment affects the equipment list pointed out into the Actual Configuration area , and the ones pointed out into the Station list and Equipment list areas. If it has been changed the list of the local equipment, it is possible that the system displays the message WARNING. The local equipment is not present in Remote Element List . Probable cause:…. Such a message warns that into the list it was absent the local equipment and points out the possible causes. If into a list, the user does not insert also the equipment to which the system is forwarding the list itself, at the next activation of the connection with such an equipment, it will result inserted into the Undefined station.

To add a station to the list 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Press the Add Station push-button. The program displays the Add New Station window. 3. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters). Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations. 4. Press Ok. The program displays the new station into the New Configuration area , at the end of the list relevant to the already existing stations. Warning. It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list.

To rename a station of the list 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window.


245

2. Into the New Configuration area , select the station to be renamed. 3. Press the Rename Station push-button. The program displays the Rename Station window. 4. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters). Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two d ifferent stations. 5. Press Ok. The program displays the new name of the station into the New Configuration area.

To remove a station from the list 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Into the New Configuration area , select the station to be removed. Warning. The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all the equipment coupled with such a station. 3. Press the Remove Station push-button. The program displays a confirmation window. 4. Press Yes. The program removes the station from the New Configuration area.

To add an equipment to the list 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Into the New Configuration area , select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled. If the user does not select any station, the program will automatically couple the equipment with the last selected station. Warning. An equipment can be coupled with o ne station only. 3. Press the Add Element push-button. Warning. If into the New Configuration area there are other stations or equipment, the pushbutton under examination will no be available if it has already been selected an equipment. The program displays the Add New Network Element window. Into the Apply to station: field, the program displays the station that will be coupled with the new equipment. 4. Into the IP address box, type the IP address of the equipment. Warning. It is not possible to create into the same list (also if into different stations) two equipment with the same IP Address. 5. Into the Element Type area , select the option p ush-button relevant to the element type to be inserted. The option: •

246

Managed by SCT, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program.

•

Remote link, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program that constitutes the equipment placed at the other end of the radio link.

•

Element Manager , points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for instance the Siae NMS5UX supervisory system).


•

Not Managed, points out an element not managed by the SCT/LMT element. This option can be used to insert into the “remote equipment list” some information such as, for instance, the coupling between the IP address and the Gosip one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

Warning. Into a “remote equipment list”, the presence of Element Manager and Not Managed type elements will not be pointed out into the Equipment list area, when it will be activated the connection with an equipment provided with the list under examination. 6. Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the Gosip address executing the following procedure: a. Activate the Gosip Address box. b. Into the SystemID field , type the desired value. c. To check or to change the setting of the default part of the address, select the Setup Default push-button. The program display the Gosip Default Option window. d. To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s. e. To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. f.

To add a value to the list, execute the following procedure: −

Press the Add push-button. The program displays the Domain Settings window.

−

Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination.

−

Into the Hex value boxes , type the values of the bytes that represent the domain.

−

Press OK

g. To remove a value from the list: −

Select the value to be removed.

−


h. To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. i. j.

To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the same procedures already pointed out for the Domain parameter. Press OK.

7. Press OK. Only if it has been activated the Gosip Address box, the program displays a confirmation message. Press Ok to continue the procedure. Into the New Configuration area , under the selected station, the program displays a record called Equipment , with the characteristics of the new equipment. Warning. The name of the equipment, present into the “remote equipment” list, will no be pointed out into the Equipment List area. Into this area, the program points out the network identification code of the equipment, assigned by the user, by means of the Properties option.

Repeat the procedure to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment (Managed by SCT, Remote link, Element Manager and/or Not Managed type). Warning. The LMT graphical interface manages 2 equipment only. This means that if the user is using the LMT interface at the activation of the connection with an equipment (local equipment), the program will automatically activate the connection with one remote equipment only, also if the “remote equipment” list of the local equipment contains more than 2 equipment. For this reason, it is advisable, for the users of the LMT interface only, to set “remote equipment lists” composed by one equipment only.


247

To change an equipment of the list 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Into the New Configuration area , select the equipment to be changed. 3. Press the Modify Element push-button. The program displays the Equipment Properties window. Into the Apply to station: field, the program points out the station coupled with the equipment. 4. To change the IP address, type the new value into the IP address box. Warning. It is not possible to assign, to the equipment, an IP Address already present into the list. 5. To change the element type, select the desired push button into the Element Type area. With details, the option: • •

•

•

Managed by SCT, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program. Remote link, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program that constitutes the equipment placed at the other end of the radio link. Element Manager , points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for instance the Siae NMS5UX supervisory system). Not Managed, points out an element not managed by the SCT/LMT element. This option can be used to insert into the “remote equipment list” some information such as, for instance, the coupling between the IP address and the Gosip one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

Warning. Into a “remote equipment list”, the presence of Element Manager and Not Managed type elements will not be pointed out into the Equipment list area, when it will be activated the connection with an equipment provided with the list under examination. 6. To set (or to change) the Gosip address (only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network) execute the following procedure: a. Activate the Gosip Address box. b. Into the SystemID field , type the desired value. c. To check or to change the setting of the default part of the address, select the Setup Default push-button. The program display the Gosip Default Option window. d. To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s. e. To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. f.

To add a value to the list, execute the following procedure: −

Press the Add push-button. The program displays the Domain Settings window.

−

Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination.

−

Into the Hex value boxes , type the values of the bytes that represent the domain.

−

Press OK

g. To remove a value from the list: −

Select the value to be removed.

−


h. To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. i. j.

248

To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the same procedures already pointed out for the Domain parameter. Press OK.


7. Press OK. Only if it has been activated the Gosip Address box, the program displays a confirmation message. Press Ok to continue the procedure. Into the New Configuration area , the program displays the new characteristics of the equipment.

To remove an equipment from the list 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Into the New Configuration area , select the equipment to be removed. 3. Press the Remove Element push-button. The program displays a confirmation window. 4. Press Yes. The program removes the station from the New Configuration area.

To move an equipment into the list With details, to move an equipment from one station to another o ne: 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Select the equipment to be moved. 3. Press the Move To Station push-button. The program displays a list of the stations present into the New Configuration area. 4. Select the station where the equipment has to be moved. The program displays a confirmation window. 5. Press the Yes push-button. The program moves the equipment into the selected station. To move an equipment between the list of equipment of a station: 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Select, into the New Configuration area , the equipment to be moved. 3. Press the push-button , to move the equipment above the previous one. 4. Press the push-button , to move the equipment below the next one.

To clear the list present into the New Configuration area 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Press the Clear List push-button. The program clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the New Configuration area.


249

To check the “remote equipment list” stored into an equipment 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Into the Actual Configuration area , select the equipment with the list to be checked

152

.

It is not possible to select more equipment at the same time. 3. Choose the Retrieve push-button. Warning. If it has been selected a station, this push-button is not available. Into the New Configuration area, the program displays the “remote equipment list” currently stored into the selected equipment.

To save into a file the “remote equipment list” 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Set the desired “remote equipment list” 3. Choose the Save To File push-button. The program displays the Save remote element configuration file window. 4. Into the proper box, type the name of the file (with .rel extension ) and set the path for the execution of the saving operation. By default, the program suggests the folder where it has been installed the SCT/LMT program. 5. Choose the Save push-button.

To display the “remote equipment list” stored into a file 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Choose the Read From File push-button. The program displays the Open remote element configuration file window. 3. Select the file (with .rel extension ) where it has been stored the desired “remote equipment list”. Into the New Configuration area , the program displays the “remote equipment list”.

To reset the “remote equipment list” stored into one or more equipment 1. Choose the Tools – Subnetwork Configuration Wizard command (SCT/LMT window). The system displays the Subnetwork Configuration Wizard window. 2. Into the Actual Configuration area , activate the control box relevant to the equipment with the list to be reset 152. The user can activate all the desired boxes. If the user activate the box relevant to a station, the program will automatically activate the boxes relevant to the equipment, coupled with such a station, in connected/login status.

250


Warning. To delete the “remote equipment list”, it is necessary for the selected equipment to be in connected/login status and the user who has requested for the login (of every equipment) must have the System or Station Operator profile (refer to Figure 49 - symbol ) 158 . 3. Select the Reset Curr Table push-button. The program displays a confirmation window. 4. Choose the Proceed to erase? Push-button. The program displays the Processing Status window , which shows the executed percentage of the operation. If the user presses the Show Report push-button, the program enlarges the Processing Status window, showing the details concerning the operation on progress 159. At the end, into the Operation column , the program points out the operation result. If the operation fails, the program keeps open the Processing Status window which shows the causes of the operation failure.

5.8.3

Tools - Monitoring File Viewer



The Monitoring File Viewer command allows displaying the contents of the monitoring files recorded with the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program 160.

Warning. The content of the monitoring (csv) files created using the 1.0 version of Alarm & Performance Monitoring program CANNOT be displayed using the Monitoring File Viewer program. Using viewer, it is possible to verify the monitoring files created with 1.1 or later versions of Alarm & Performance Monitoring. Furthermore, by Monitoring File Viewer , it is possible to display only the content of the “csv” text file created using the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program. The selection of the Monitoring File Viewer command opens the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window shown into Figure 50. Such a window displays the folders and the monitoring files present into the Root Folder 161. If the user wants displaying a specific file, he has to select the File - Open File command. While, if the user wants displaying a different folder, he has to select the File - Open Folder command (refer to note 1 in Figure 50). Warning. The Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window can be displayed also from the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program or selecting the Alarm & Performance Viewer icon present on the

160

The Alarm & Performance Monitoring program allows monitoring all the equipment connected with it and memorizing into a file the results of the PM measurements and the alarms/events. Into every file, the system memorizes the data relevant to each month. At the end of the month, the system automatically creates a new file for the results of the PM measurements and another one for the alarms/events. The monitoring files are in “csv” text format. They can be opened through the Monitoring File Viewer or through the Microsoft Excel program. More detailed information concerning the program or the modes used to save the monitoring files are reported into the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on-line guide/manual. 161

The Root Folder is the path where the system saves the monitoring files. The folder can be checked (and changed) by the user (refer to the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on-line guide/manual ).


251

desktop 162. For more detailed information, refer to the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on-line guide/manual.

Figure 50


The menu: •

File, contains the following commands: −

Open File, it allows to open a specific file. The choice of this command opens the Open File window. Select the desired path and file (.csv) and press Open button. The File History with the selected file, if not already present, is displayed in the “folder/file” area. Warning. If the File Already Open message is displayed, this means that the selected file is already present in the File History directory.

−

Open Folder, it allows to open a specific directory.

162

Warning. The Alarm & Performance Viewer icon is present on the desktop only if it has been installed the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program.

252


The choice of this command opens the Select Folder window. Select the desired path and press the Select button. The new path is displayed as Root Folder in the “folder/file” area.

•

(2)

−

Clear, it allows to clear the list present in “folder/file” area.

−

Exit, it allows to close the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window.

Help, it contains the commands to access the program help on line.

To display the data relevant to another file, it is necessary to select the new file. If the file is not in the same directory of the previous one, open the directory where the file resides and select it. Warning. If the “Impossible to proceed due to…” message is displayed, this means that the selected file has been saved using the 1.0 version of the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program. The viewer allows to display the monitoring files created using the 1.1 or later versions of Alarm & Performance Monitoring.

(3)

Under the directory named: •

•

Root Folder […] indicated:

163

, the directories and the monitoring files

164

here present are

161

−

in Root Folder

.

−

in the folder selected by user by Open Folder command (see note 1).

File History, the monitoring files opened by user by the Open File command (see note 1) are displayed. Warning. The File History directory is not always present in the window. It is displayed when the first file is o pened.

The directories are indicated by symbols (

- compressed directory,

directory). The monitoring files (.csv) are indicated by

- expanded

symbol.

Warning. If files with extension different from csv are present in the directory, these are not displayed in “folder/file” area. (4)

The content of this area changes according to the type of selected monitoring file (alarms/events or PM measurements). The detailed description of the content of this area, if a monitoring file is selected of type: •

alarms/events, is reported in Format of alarms/events data paragraph.

•

PM measurements is reported in Format of data: PM measurements paragraph.

Warning. If a file is selected and its content is empty (because, for instance, the minimum period for data recording – 15 minutes – has not spent from the start of the monitoring) the relevant area will be empty. (5)

The path and the currently selected file, which the data displayed in the figure are referred to, and the version of Monitoring File Viewer are displayed in the status bar.

Format of the alarms/events data (Events) When a monitoring file, relevant to alarms/events, is selected in the “folder/file” area (see Figure 50), the data present in the file are displayed in the format shown in Figure 51. Warning. The monitoring files can be opened also using the Microsoft Excel program. The format used to display the data, if the file is opened by Excel, is shown in Alarm & Performance Monitoring help online/manual.

163

The path is pointed out within square brackets.

164

The description of the path, where the files are saved, and the description of the monitoring files are reported in Alarm & Performance Monitoring help online/manual.


253

Figure 51


The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal itself. The date/time format changes according to the setting executed into its own Windows operating system.

(2)

The different wordings point out if the record refers to a status or alarm signal and if the signal has been detected or it has been reset. If the record refers to an alarm, it is also pointed out its seriousness level. With details, the wording:

(3)

−

CLEARED points out the alarm signal reset

−

STATUS points out the status o r event signal

−

WARNING points out the alarm signal detected with Warning seriousness

−

MINOR points out the alarm signal detected with Minor seriousness

−

MAJOR points out the alarm signal d etected with Major seriousness

−

CRITICAL points out the alarm signal detected with Critical seriousness

The presence of the “SET” wording points out that the record refers to a detected alarm, while the presence of the “CLEARED” wording to a reset alarm.

Format of the data relevant to the PM measurements (Performances) When a monitoring file, relevant to PM measurements, is selected in the “folder/file” area (see Figure 50), the data present in the file are displayed in the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window using the chart format, subdivided in days (of the selected month). Using the buttons present in the window, it is possible to verify the detail of the data relevant to a specific day of the month and/or a specific hour of the day, to modify the type of displaying from chart to table format, to expand and to compress data, to verify the counters’ status, etc.

Here below the following information are reported, relevant to the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window:

254

•

data subdivision (monthly, daily, hourly displaying)

•

type of data displaying: chart or table format

•

type of data displaying: compressed or expanded

•

displaying modality of the control parameters

•

displaying modality of the counters' status


Warning. The monitoring files can be opened also using Microsoft Excel program. The format used to display the data, if the file is opened by Excel, is pointed out in Alarm & Performance Monitoring help online/manual.

Data subdivision (monthly, daily, hourly displaying) The results of the PM measurements can be displayed in the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window, subdivided by month, day and hour. When a monitoring file, relevant to the PM measurements, is selected in “folder/file” area (see Figure 50), the data relevant to the selected month are displayed in the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window 165. The name of the chart/table points out the displaying type and the selected month: Day View (month) 166.

To display the data relevant to a specific day of the selected month, it is necessary to choose the Hours button: the figure will display the data subdivided within the 24 hours of the day. When the button is pressed, its label changes from Hours to Quarters, the Days button and the Day box become active. To change the displayed day, use the arrows of the Day box. The name of the chart/table points out the displaying type and the selected day/month: Hour View (day - month). Select the Days button to come back to the displaying of data subdivided in days (monthly subdivision).

To display the data the data relevant to a specific hour of the day selected in the Day box, it is necessary to choose the Quarters button: the figure will display the data subdivided by quarters of hour. When the button is pressed, it becomes deactivated, the label of the Days button changes to Hours, the label of the Day box changes to Hour . To change the displayed hour, use the arrows of the Hour box. The name of the chart/table points out the displaying type and the selected hour/day/month: Quarter an Hour View (day – month - hour). Select the Hours button to come back to the displaying of data subdivided in hours (daily displaying). Warning. If the Quarters button is not available, it means that the monitoring file has recorded the data subdivided in observation periods of 1 hour 167, then the data for the displaying by quarters are not available.

Figure 52 shows an example

165

Each monitoring file is contained in the directory that identifies the month when it has been recorded. More information about the path where the monitoring file are recorded are reported in Alarm & Performance Monitoring help online/manual. 166

The language used to display the month depends on the settings, relevant to language, of the Windows Operating System. 167

The Alarm & Performance Monitoring program stores the results of the PM measurements, subdivided in observation periods of 15 minutes or 1 hour, to file. This parameter can be changed by the user (refer to Alarm & Performance Monitoring help online/manual).


255

Type of data displaying: chart or table format The results of the PM measurements can be displayed in Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window, in chart or table format. When a monitoring file, relevant to the PM measurements, is selected in “folder/file” area (see Figure 50), the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window displays the data in chart format. To display the data in table format, it is necessary to choose the Table View button: the figure will display the data in a table. When the button is pressed, its label changes from Table View to Chart View . Select the Chart View button to come back to the data displaying in chart. When the button is pressed, its label changes from Chart View to Table View . Figure 52 shows an example

Figure 52

256



The format of the data/hour changes depending on the settings made in the Windows Operating System.

Type of data displaying: compressed or expanded The results of the PM measurements can be displayed in the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window, compressed or expanded. “Compressed” means that the window will display, at the same time, all the days of the month (monthly displaying) or all the hours of a day (daily displaying). Warning. The hourly displaying cannot be expanded, because it is automatically displayed in expanded format.

When a monitoring file, relevant to the PM measurements, is selected in “folder/file” area (see Figure 50), the Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window displays the data in compressed chart format. To display the expanded data, it is necessary to choose the Enlarge button: the figure will display the expanded data. Use the horizontal scroll bar to scroll the whole chart. When the button is pressed, its label changes from Enlarge to Restrict . Select the Restrict button to come back to the compressed data displaying. When the button is pressed, its label changes from Restrict to Enlarge.

When the monthly or daily chart is displayed in expanded format, the window displays also the records’ status and the relevant legend.

Warning. The Enlarge/Restrict button is not available when the data are displayed: •

in table format;

•

subdivided in quarters (daily displaying - table/chart title Quarter an Hour View…).

Figure 53 shows an example


257

Figure 53

258


Displaying modality of the control parameters The Alarm & Performance Monitoring Viewer window contemporary displays , for each type of PM measurements, only the results of a specific measure, whose control parameters has the same measurement unit. The measurement type and the measurement unit of the parameters displayed in the window are displayed in the Measure box. To change them, select the arrow on the side of the box and choose the new value from the list. The available measurement types change according to the equipment type to which the data refer168. With details, for the EL equipment 169, the wording: −

G826 – Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826 Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the second: ES, SES, UAS.

−

G826 – Blocks, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826 Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the block: BBE.

−

Rx Pwr – dB, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to Rx Pwr Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is dB: Hi, Low.

−

Rlst - Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to Rx Pwr Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the second: , , , . Warning. The parameters under examination are pointed out only if the relevant thresholds are active 170.

While for the US equipment 171, if the user has selected a file: •

•

… PM_LINE…, the wording: −

G826 MstB2M1 – Blocks, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826SMstB2M1 Line measurement, whose measurement unit is the block: BBE, BBEFE.

−

G826 MstB2M1 – Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826SMstB2M1 Line measurement, whose measurement unit is the second: ES, SES, UAS, ESFE, SESFE, UASFE e UASBIDI.

−

G826 RstB1 – Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826SRstB1 Line measurement, whose measurement unit is the second: ES, SES, UAS, OOFS.

−

G826 RstB1 – Blocks, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826SRstB1 Line measurement, whose measurement unit is the block: BBE.

…PM_Branch…, the wording: −

G826 MstB2M1 – Blocks, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826SMstB2M1 Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the block: BBE, BBEFE.

−

G826 MstB2M1 – Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826SMstB2M1 Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the second: ES, SES, UAS, ESFE, SESFE, UASFE e UASBIDI.

−

G826 RstB1 – Blocks, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826SRstB1 Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the block: BBE.

168

Warning. The current version of the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program supports the monitoring of the EL and US radio equipment. 169

The description of the measurement types and of the relevant quality parameters for the EL radio equipment are reported into the PM Measurements for the EL radio equipment paragraph. 170

The user of the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program is able to activate/deactivate and to change the threshold levels of the received po wer. 171

The description of the measurement types and of the relevant quality parameters for the US radio equipment are reported into the PM Measurements for the US radio equipment paragraph.


259

−

G826 RstB1 Radio – Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826SRstB1 Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the second: ES, SES, UAS, OOFS.

−

Rx Pwr – dBm, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to Rx Pwr Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is dBm: Hi, Low.

−

Rx Rlst - Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to Rx Pwr Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the second: , , , . Warning. The parameters under examination are pointed out only if the relevant thresholds are active 170.

−

Tx Pwr – dBm, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to Tx Pwr Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is dBm: Hi, Low.

−

Tx Rlst - Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to Tx Pwr Radio measurement, whose measurement unit is the second: , , , .

Warning. The parameters under examination are pointed out only if the relevant thresholds are active 172. •

…PM_Vc12_…, the wording: −

G826 – Blocks, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826Vc12Path… (Tug3=… Tug2=… Tug12=…) measurement, whose measurement unit is the blocks: BBE, BBEFE.

−

G826 - Seconds, points out that the window displays the results of the following quality parameters, relevant to G826Vc12Path… (Tug3=… Tug2=… Tug12=…) measurement, whose measurement unit is the seconds: ES, SES, UAS, ESFE, SESFE, UASFE e UASBIDI.

Figure 54 shows an example.

172

The user of the Alarm & Performance Monitoring program is able to activate/deactivate and to change the threshold levels of the transmitted power.

260


Figure 54


Each control parameter is identified by a color. The corresponding parameter-color is always displayed under the chart.

(2)

For the displaying: •

monthly, the data are subdivided in d ays;

•

daily, the data are subdivided in hours;

hourly, the data are subdivided in quarters.


261

Displaying modality of the counters’ status For each counter, the relevant status can be displayed. In the monthly and daily displaying in compressed chart format, the counters’ status is not displayed. To display it, it is necessary to expand the chart (see Figure 55). Differently, for the daily displaying in chart format, which is automatically displayed in expanded format, the counters’ status is always displayed. In the monthly, daily, hourly displaying in table format, the counters’ status is always pointed out by a wording in the Status column (see Figure 55).

Figure 55



NE (white) – Not Exists in File. It points out that the record is not available, because the measurement was not active during the observation period.

•

ML (green) - Meaningless. It points out that the record has been completely acquired and the measurement is not affected by errors.

•

MF (green) – Meaningful. It points out that the record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value.

•

IN (yellow) – Incomplete. It points out that the record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measurement starting record is always in this status. Warning. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day

262


•

LO (red) – Lost. It points out that the record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.

•

RE (red) – Restarted. It points out that the record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measurement is activated for a certain measurement point, all the record coupled with such a measurement point will result in this status.

Warning. The values of the counters can be present or not into the monitoring file, according to the setting executed by the user 173.

173

More detailed information are reported into the Alarm & Performance Monitoring on-line guide/manual.


263

Manual Sct Lct

Recommend Documents